Camry HV (2022) - Automotive TOYOTA - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Hybrid Sedan
Brand	Toyota
Model	Camry HV (2022)
Year	2022
Overall Length	192.1 in (4880 mm)
Overall Width	72.4 in (1840 mm)
Overall Height	56.9 in (1445 mm)
Wheelbase	111.2 in (2825 mm)
Curb Weight	3,480 lb (1578 kg)
Fuel Type	Gasoline + Electric Hybrid
Engine	2.5L 4-cylinder Dynamic Force (A25A-FXS)
Transmission	eCVT (Electronic Continuously Variable Transmission)
Hybrid Battery	Lithium-ion, 1.6 kWh
Fuel Economy (City)	51 mpg (4.6 L/100km)
Fuel Economy (Highway)	53 mpg (4.4 L/100km)
Seating Capacity	5 passengers
Key Less Entry	Smart Key System with Push Button Start
Safety Features	Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+ (Pre-Collision, Lane Departure Alert, Adaptive Cruise Control, etc.)
Maintenance Interval	Every 10,000 miles or 12 months
Recommended Oil	0W-16 synthetic oil
Spare Parts & Repairability	Genuine Toyota parts available; hybrid battery warranty 10 years/150,000 miles

Frequently Asked Questions - Camry HV (2022) TOYOTA

What type of oil does the 2022 Camry Hybrid use?

How often should I change the oil in my Camry Hybrid?

What is the hybrid battery warranty coverage?

Can I jump-start another car with the Camry Hybrid?

What is the towing capacity of the 2022 Camry Hybrid?

How do I check the hybrid battery charge level?

What tire pressure is recommended?

Does the Camry Hybrid require premium fuel?

How do I reset the maintenance light?

Where can I find the owner's manual?

USER MANUAL Camry HV (2022) TOYOTA

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

1	For safety and security	Make sure to read through them
2	Instrument cluster	How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning lights and indicators, etc.
3	Operation of each component	Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving, etc.
4	Driving	Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
5	Interior features	Usage of the interior features, etc.
6	Maintenance and care	Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
7	When trouble arises	What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
8	Vehicle specifications	Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
9	For owners	Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index	Search by symptom
	Search alphabetically

For your information.... 6

Reading this manual.... 12

How to search.... 13

Pictorial index 14

1 For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.... 24

For safe driving 26

Seat belts 28

SRS airbags.... 34

Front passenger occupant classification system ...... 47

Exhaust gas precautions..... 52

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children...... 53

Child restraint systems...... 54

1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect.... 73

1-4. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features ..... 78

Hybrid system precautions 82

1-5. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system 89

Alarm.... 90

2 Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators ....94

Gauges and meters.....100

Multi-information display (4.2-inch display) .....104

Multi-information display (7-inch display) .....117

Head-up display......136

Energy monitor/ consumption screen .....142

3 Operation of each component

3-1. Key information

Keys......150

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Doors....154

Trunk 160

Smart key system......164

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats....171

Rear seats 173

Head restraints .....175

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel....177

Inside rear view mirror.....179

Outside rear view mirrors ....181

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows....183

Moon roof 186

4 Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle.... 192

Cargo and luggage...... 200

Vehicle load limits 203

Trailer towing.... 204

Dinghy towing.... 205

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch ..... 206

EV drive mode.... 213

Hybrid transmission...... 216

Turn signal lever.... 222

Parking brake.... 223

Brake Hold 227

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch.... 230

AHB (Automatic High Beam) 234

Windshield wipers and washer 238

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap 242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+ ....246

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 252

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....267

RSA (Road Sign Assist) ....282

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ....287

Driving assist systems .....303

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 310

• BSM function......313

Intuitive parking assist .....317

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)....326

• RCTA function......328

RCD (Rear Camera Detection) 335

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)....340

Parking Support Brake function (static objects)....348

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) 352

Driving mode select switches....355

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips....357

Winter driving tips......360

5 Interior features

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system.... 366

Heated steering wheel/ seat heaters/ seat ventilators.... 375

5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list 378

• Interior lights .... 379
  • Personal lights .... 380

5-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features..... 381

• Glove box.... 382
• Console box...... 382
• Coin holder 382
• Bottle holders...... 383
  • Cup holders ..... 384
• Auxiliary boxes...... 385
• Open tray 386

Trunk features...... 387

5-4. Other interior features

Other interior features ..... 388

• Sun visors 388
  • Vanity mirrors...... 388
  • Power outlet...... 389
  • USB charging ports..... 390
• Wireless charger...... 392
• Armrest 401
• Assist grips .... 401
• Coat hooks...... 402

6 Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior .....412

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior .....416

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements ....419

General maintenance .....422

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ....426

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions....427

Hood....429

Positioning a floor jack.....431

Engine compartment .....432

12-volt battery......440

Tires....444

Tire inflation pressure......458

Wheels......461

Air conditioning filter .....463

Cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent and filter .....465

Electronic key battery .....470

Checking and replacing fuses....473

Light bulbs 476

7 When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ..... 490

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 491

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising 492

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed 493

If you think something is wrong.... 496

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds.... 497

If a warning message is displayed .... 507

If you have a flat tire...... 513

If the hybrid system will not start 525

If the electronic key does not operate properly .... 527

If the 12-volt battery is discharged.... 530

If your vehicle overheats .... 537

If the vehicle becomes stuck.... 541

8 Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) .....544 Fuel information.....553 Tire information.....556

8-2. Customization

Customizable features.....569

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize....577

9 For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ....580

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners ....581

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)....582

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)....583

Index

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)....594

Alphabetical index......597

For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to "NAV-IGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

• Navigation system
• Audio system
• Rear view monitor system

• Toyota parking assist monitor
- Panoramic view monitor
- Connected Services

For your information

Main Owner's Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle and the illustrations used may differ from your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. Over time, your vehicle may receive updates that modify the vehicle and make material in this manual incomplete and/or inaccurate. Because of Toyota's interest in continual product improvement, Toyota reserves the right to make changes to this manual at any time without notice.

If Toyota chooses to update the manual, updated versions can be viewed by selecting your vehicle by model and year at the following URL or on your mobile device if you have access to the Toyota app.

www.toyota.com/owners

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system

Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Also, remodeling like this will have an effect on advanced safety equipment such as Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+ and there is a danger that it will not work properly or the danger that it may work in situations where it should not be working.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
- Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.

Vehicle data recording

The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed/Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
- Accelerator status
- Brake status
- Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the driving assist systems
- Images from the cameras

Your vehicle is equipped with cameras. Contact your Toyota dealer for the location of recording cameras.

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped.

These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.

●Data Transmission

Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota without notification to you.

●Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

●Recorded image information can be erased by your Toyota dealer.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the system operates will not be available.

- To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S. mainland only)

If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

● To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-stened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

●Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
  However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include the airbags, seat belt pretensioners, wireless remote control batteries, and the batteries in the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.

WARNING

■General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■General precaution regarding children's safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Reading this manual

WARNING:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death serious injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.

1 2 3 ...

Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard shift, with no visible text or symbols

Indicates the component or position being explained.

Means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen".

CTHPIBT139

How to search

■Searching by name

• Alphabetical index.....P. 597

ABS? SRS? ABS-100 SRS-210 CTHPIAP015

■Searching by installation position

- Pictorial index......P. 14

Illustration of a person using a laptop with a thought bubble showing a lightbulb and a car (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

■Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if... (Troubleshooting) .....P. 594

Illustration of a person reading a book with a lightbulb symbol above, next to a car with lightning bolts (no text or symbols on the car or background)

■Searching by title

- Table of contents......P. 2

Illustration of a person reading an open book with a lightbulb above, symbolizing ideas or learning (no text or symbols present)

Pictorial index

Exterior

Technical diagram of a car with numbered parts and component annotations in Chinese, including part numbers and part numbers.

① Doors P. 154

Locking/unlocking P. 154

Opening/closing the door windows P. 183

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key ..... P. 527

② Trunk....P. 160

Opening from inside....P. 160

Opening from outside P. 160

③ Outside rear view mirrors....P. 181

Adjusting the mirror angle....P. 181

Folding the mirrors. P. 181

Defogging the mirrors ^*1 P. 370

④ Windshield wipers P. 238

Precautions for winter season....P. 360

⑤ Fuel filler door....P. 242

Refueling method....P. 242

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity P. 546, 553

⑥ Tires....P. 444

Tire size/inflation pressure P. 550

Winter tires/tire chains P. 360

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system.....P. 444

Coping with flat tires P. 513

⑦ Hood....P. 429

Opening P. 429

Engine oil P. 547

Coping with overheat P. 537

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P. 476, Watts: P. 552)

⑧ Front turn signal lights/parking lights/daytime running lights ^*2 P. 230

⑨ Headlights/daytime running lights ^*3 P. 230

⑩ Front side marker lights P. 230

⑪ Side turn signal lights ^*1 P. 222

⑫ Rear turn signal lights/rear side marker lights/tail lights/stoplights. P. 222, 230

⑬ Tail lights ^*1 P. 230

Back-up lights Shifting the shift lever to R. P. 216

⑭ License plate lights P. 230

Instrument panel

④ ③ ⑤ ⑥ ⑩ ⑦ ⑧ ① ② ⑨ CTHPIBT212

① Power switch P. 206

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes ..... P. 206

Emergency stop of the hybrid system....P. 491

When the hybrid system will not start P. 525

Precautions for towing P. 493

When the shift lever does not move P. 220

③ Meters P. 100

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel lights . . . . P. 100

Warning lights/indicator lights P. 94

When a warning light comes on. P. 497

Multi-information display P. 104, 117

Display P. 104, 117

When the warning messages are displayed ..... P. 507

④ Turn signal lever P. 222

Headlight switch P. 230

Headlights/side marker lights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights/daytime running lights P. 230

⑤ Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 238

Usage P. 238

Adding washer fluid P. 439

⑥ Emergency flasher switch P. 490

⑦ Hood lock release lever....P. 429

⑧ Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever ..... P. 177

⑨ Air conditioning system....P. 366

Usage P. 366

Rear window defogger....P. 370

⑩ Audio ^*1,2

Audio Plus ^*1,2

Premium Audio ^*1,2

Clock ^*2

Switches

Diagram of car interior control panel with numbered labels and function buttons for navigation and display functions

① Automatic High Beam switch P. 234
② VSC OFF switch P. 304
③ Camera switch*1, 2
④ Trunk opener switch....P. 160
⑤ Fuel filler door opener switch. P. 244
⑥ Heated steering wheel switch ^*1 P. 376
⑦ “ODO/TRIP” switch....P. 105, 119
⑧ Instrument panel light control switch ..... P. 101
⑨ Outside rear view mirror switch P. 181
⑩ Door lock switches P. 156
⑪ Power window switches P. 183
⑫ Window lock switch. P. 183

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ + C + RES CANCE - SET MODE + V + V CTHPIBT004

① Meter control switches....P. 105, 119
② Paddle shift switches ^1 P. 216
③ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch. P. 294
④ Cruise control switches Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range. . . . . . . P. 287
⑤ Audio remote control switches ^2
⑥ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch....P. 267
⑦ Phone switch*2
⑧ Talk switch*2

① ② ⑥ ⑤ ③ ④ CTHPIBT215

① Wireless charger switch* P. 392
② Seat heater switches* P. 375

Seat ventilator switches ^* P. 375

③ Parking brake....P. 223

Applying/releasing P. 223, 224

Precautions for winter season....P. 361

Warning light/warning buzzer/ warning message.... P. 226, 497

④ EV drive mode switch....P. 213
⑤ Brake hold switch P. 227
⑥ Driving mode select switches P. 355

Interior

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ CTHPIBT134

① SRS airbags P. 34
② Floor mats P. 24
③ Front seats P. 171
④ Head restraints....P. 175
⑤ Seat belts P. 28
⑥ Console box....P. 382
⑦ Inside lock buttons P. 156
⑧ Cup holders....P. 384
⑨ Rear seats....P. 173
⑩ Assist grips P. 401

① ② ② ① ③ ⑥ ⑦ ⑤ ④ CTHPIBT007

① Interior lights/personal lights ^1 P. 378
② Moon roof switches ^2 P. 186
③ “SOS” button ^2 P.73
④ Vanity mirrors....P. 388
⑤ Sun visors P. 388
⑥ Inside rear view mirror P. 179
⑦ Garage door opener switches ^2 P. 403

For safety and security

1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.... 24

For safe driving 26

Seat belts 28

SRS airbags.... 34

Front passenger occupant classification system ..... 47

Exhaust gas precautions..... 52

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children...... 53

Child restraint systems...... 54

1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect 73

1-4. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features ..... 78

Hybrid system precautions 82

1-5. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system 89

Alarm....90

Before driving

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

STS35AJ002

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

STS35AN002

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

- When installing the driver's floor mat

• Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
• Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
  ● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
• Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
• Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Before driving

- Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

With the hybrid system stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

STS35AJ003

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture

① Adjust the angle of the seat-back so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (→P. 171)

② Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (→P. 171)

CTY11BJ001

③ Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 175)

④ Wear the seat belt correctly. ( P. 28)

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P. 28)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

(→P. 54)

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. ( P. 179, 181)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
• Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
• Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
  ●Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
• When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
  Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slid shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

- Adjust the position of the seat-back. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

●Do not twist the seat belt.

e off the CTY13AV011

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

① To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

② To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button ① ② CTH11BT002

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

① Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.
② Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up while pressing the release button.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

① ② CTH11BT003

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

Interior view of a car showing multiple driver seats and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 56)

■Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 54)
- When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 28)

■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, showing rope routing and angle adjustment (no text or symbols)

Rear seat belt

Use the seat belt after passing it through the guide if the seat belt comes free from the guide.

Diagram of a car's side profile showing a curved track and a clip with an arrow, no text or symbols present.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■Wearing a seat belt

●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 28)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

Two line drawings of a person seated in different positions, one with a seatbelt and the other with a crossbar (no text or symbols)

■People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 28)

WARNING

■When children are in the vehicle

→P. 66

■Seat belt pretensioners

• Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
• If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

■Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 29)

■Seat belt damage and wear

• Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.
• Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
• Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.
• Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
• Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
  ● Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount of protection in an accident and could lead to death or serious injury in a collision or sudden stop.
  ●Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.

WARNING

■ Using a seat belt extender

• Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
• Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
  ●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

CTH11BT057

◆ SRS front airbags

① SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
② SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags

③ SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
④ SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
⑤ SRS curtain shield airbags

●Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
●Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

SRS airbag system components

Technical diagram of a car's internal components with numbered parts for identification

① Front impact sensors
② Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
③ Knee airbags
④ Side impact sensors (front doors)
⑤ Side impact sensors (front)
⑥ Front passenger airbag
⑦ Front side airbags
⑧ Curtain shield airbags
⑨ Rear side airbags
⑩ "AIRBAG ON" and "AIRBAG OFF" indicator lights

⑪ SRS warning light
⑫ Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch
⑬ Airbag sensor assembly
⑭ Side impact sensors (rear)
⑮ Driver airbag
⑯ Driver's seat belt buckle switch
⑰ Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters
⑱ Driver's seat position sensor

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

- If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

- If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

CTH11BT010

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
- Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 54)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

CTH11BT109

- Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

- Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

CTH11BT110

- Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

CTH11BT013

- Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

CTH11BT014

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

- Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

CTH11BT111

- Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield, windows, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

CTH11BT112

- Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

• If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
• Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components or the front doors.
  Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
• Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
• If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
• If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
• Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.

WARNING

■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars, roof side rails, front door panels, front door trims or front door speakers
● Modifications to the front door panel (such as making a hole in it)
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

• Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
  ●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
  ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
  ●The windshield may crack.
  ● The hybrid system will be stopped and fuel supply to the engine will be stopped. (→P. 83)
  ● All of the doors will be unlocked. (→P. 158)
  ● The brakes and stop lights will be controlled automatically. (→P. 303)
  ● The interior lights will turn on automatically. (→P. 380)
  ● The emergency flashers will turn on automatically. (→P. 490)

For Safety Connect subscribers, if any of the following situations occur, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle's location (without needing to push the "SOS" button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (→P. 73)

• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.
- The vehicle is involved in a severe rearend collision.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
  ● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.
  ● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

• The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
  ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may deploy in the event of a severe side collision.
  ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
  ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or falling

CTH11BT018

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

Two line drawings of a car on different positions, one showing a broken frame and the other with a visible suspension (no text or symbols)

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

• Collision from the side
• Collision from the rear
  ● Vehicle rollover

CTH11BT121

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

- Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

- Collision from the side at an angle

Two mechanical component diagrams showing a curved assembly with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

●Collision from the front

- Collision from the rear

●Vehicle rollover

Top-down diagram of a car showing three views: front, side, and rear (no text or symbols)

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

- Collision from the rear

● Pitching end over end

CTH11BT023

■When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

●The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

Top-down line drawing of a car with curved roof and side-mounted wheels (no text or symbols)

- A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged, deformed or has had a hole made in it, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

Top-down line drawing of a car with horizontal double-headed arrows indicating height or dimension (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

●The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger air-bag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Top-down line drawing of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

●The surface of the seats with the SRS side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seats (no text or symbols)

●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the SRS curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat compartments (no text or symbols)

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag.

① ② PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ③ ④ CTH11BT123

① Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light
② SRS warning light
③ “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light
④ “AIRBAG ON” indicator light

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■Adult* 1

Indicator/warning light	“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIRBAG ON”
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light	Off^*2 or flashing^*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Activated
	Front passenger knee airbag

Child* 4

Indicator/warning light	“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIRBAG OFF” or “AIRBAG ON”*4
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light	Off*2 or flashing*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated or activated*4
	Front passenger knee airbag

■Child restraint system with infant* 5

Indicator/warning light	“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIRBAG OFF”*6
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light	Off*2 or flashing*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated
	Front passenger knee airbag

Unoccupied

Indicator/warning light	“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIRBAG OFF”
	SRS warning light	Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated
	Front passenger knee airbag

■There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/warning light	“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIRBAG OFF”
	SRS warning light	On
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated
	Front passenger knee airbag

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 54)
*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 56)

WARNING

■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger's seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
Make sure the "AIRBAG OFF" indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the "AIRBAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the "AIRBAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the "AIRBAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
- Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).
- Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
- Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
- Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

WARNING

■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

• Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the "AIRBAG OFF" indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
• If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
• When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 58)
• Do not modify or remove the front seats.
• Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
  ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
• Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
  ●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
• Do not place anything between the console box and front passenger seat. Otherwise, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.
• Adjust the front passenger seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling. If the head restraint is left in contact with the ceiling, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

• Keep the trunk lid closed.
• If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

When parking

• If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.
• Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Riding with children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

• It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
• Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.
  ●Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.

Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child's safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the restraint system.

Table of contents

Points to remember....P. 54

Child restraint system....P. 56

When using a child restraint system....P. 58

Child restraint system installation method

• Fixed with a seat belt ......P. 61
• Fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor....P. 67
• Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap) ...... P. 70

Points to remember

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

• Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regulations for child restraint systems.
• Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.
• Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

WARNING

■When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instruction is provided in this manual.
Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
- Holding a child in your or someone else's arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.

■Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.

• If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.
  Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.
• Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
• If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.

Child restraint system

■Types of child restraint system installation methods

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system.

Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment		P.61
Child restraint LATCH anchors attachment		P.67
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attachment	Seats with an adjustable type head restraintSeats with an integrated type head restraint	P.70

When using a child restraint system

■ When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install child restraint systems to a rear seats. When installing child restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system.

●Raise the seatback as much as possible
●Move the seat to the rear-most position
●Raise the seat to the highest position
- If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint

Illustration of a car seat with directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■When using a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, and raise the seat to the upper most position, even if the "AIRBAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated.

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, no text or symbols present

If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.

- Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillars, or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

CTH12BT071

WARNING

■When using a child restraint system

- When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.

- Use child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat.

- If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

- Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

CTH12BT008

Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

■Rear-facing — Infant seat/convertible seat

1 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with no text or symbols

2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a belt switch and arrow indicating a specific seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle assembly with a red arrow indicating the belt (no text or symbols present)

4 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retra the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

act until CTH12BT012

5 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P. 66)

■Forward-facing — Convertible seat

1 When using the front passenger seat: Adjust the seatback If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P. 58 for the front passenger seat adjustment.

2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P. 175)

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a pink arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Technical line drawing of a car seat assembly with no visible text or symbols

4 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Technical line drawing of a car seatbelt assembly (no text or symbols)

5 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car interior showing seatbelt and dashboard components (no text or symbols)

6 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

Technical diagram of a vehicle interior showing engine compartment and wiring (no text or symbols)

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

7 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer's operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 70)

8 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P. 66)

■ Booster seat

1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P. 58 for the front passenger seat adjustment.

2 High back type: If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P. 175)

system, and CTH12BT013

3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

▶ Booster type

▶ High back type

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a blue clip and attached straps (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with labeled CTH12BT077 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

4 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seat with a red belt, no text or symbols present

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P. 28)

Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system.

Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.

Technical line drawing of a sewing machine needle and fastener (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
  If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
• Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
  ● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.
  ●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
• When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.
  ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
• When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 30)

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor

■Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Marks displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

CTH12BT144

■When installing in the rear outboard seats

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

1 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P. 175)

Diagram of a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the cover.

CTH12BT082

▶ With flexible lower attachments

3 Latch the hooks of the lower attachments onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only CTH12BT153

▶ With rigid lower attachments

3 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only CTH12BT154

4 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer's operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 70)

5 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P. 66)

■When installing in the rear center seat

There are no LATCH anchors behind the rear center seat. However, the inboard LATCH anchors of the outboard seats, which are 16.1 in. (410 mm) apart, can be used if the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit use of those anchors with the anchor spacing stated.

Child restraint systems with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of child restraint system can only be installed in the outboard seat.

■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
• Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
  ● Never attach two child restraint system attachments to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child restraint system attachments and may break.
  If the LATCH anchors are already in use, use the seat belt to install a child restraint system in the center seat.
• When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
• If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint system.

Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

■Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat.

Use anchor brackets when fixing the top tether strap.

▶ Seats with an adjustable type head restraint

▶ Seats with an integrated type head restraint

Anchor brackets CTH12BT164

Anchor brackets CTH12BT165

■Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

1 Adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.

If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P. 175)

Diagram of a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

2 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. (→P. 66)

When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, be sure to have the top tether strap pass underneath the head restraint.

▶ Seats with an adjustable type head restraint

▶ Seats with an integrated type head restraint

Top tether strap Hook CTH12BT027

Top tether strap Hook CTH12BT028

■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted.
• Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.
  ●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
• Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
• When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, after the head restraint has been raised and then the anchor bracket has been fixed, do not lower the head restraint.

NOTICE

■Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

When not in use, make certain to close the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be damaged.

Safety Connect\*

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Toyota's designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

■System components

① Microphone
② LED light indicators
③ “SOS” button

③ SOS ② ① CTH13BT052

Services

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:

●Automatic Collision Notification *

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. ( P. 76)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

●Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. ( P. 76)

●Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS")

Connects drivers to response-center support. ( P. 76)

●Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. ( P. 77)

Subscription

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms are available for purchase. Contact your Toyota dealer, call the following appropriate Customer Experience Center or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

• The United States 1-800-331-4331

• Canada 1-888-869-6828

• Puerto Rico 1-877-855-8377

■Safety Connect Services Information

- Phone calls using the vehicle's Bluetooth ^ technology will not be possible when Safety Connect is active and in use.

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement are required. A variety of subscription terms are available; charges vary by subscription term selected and location.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location are available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico and Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance are available in the United States, Puerto Rico and Canada.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle and Enhanced Road Assistance are not available in the U.S. Virgin Islands. For vehicles first sold in the U.S. Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect services will function in or outside the U.S. Virgin Islands.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English, Spanish, and French. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

■When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.

The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

●Green indicator light on = Active service
●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Toyota dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Safety Connect services

■Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle's location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.

■Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Customer Experience Center at 1-800-331-4331 in the United States, 1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico or 1-888-869-6828 in Canada, and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS")

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the "SOS" button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.

Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

■Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

Hybrid system features

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate it with care.

The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

① ② CTH13BT063

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

① Gasoline engine
② Electric motor (traction motor)

When stopped/during start off

The gasoline engine stops* when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped* and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.

When the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) is not being charged.

*: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will not automatically stop. (→P. 80)

During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.

When accelerating sharply

When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).

When braking (regenerative braking)

The wheels operate the electric motor (traction motor) as a power generator, and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged.

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System

When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle's approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

■Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift lever in D or S.
● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift lever in D or S.

EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor (traction motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped.

EV CTH13BT061

■Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:

●During gasoline engine warm-up
●During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
- When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low
- When the heater is switched on

Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery (traction battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you are unable to start the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

→P. 533

■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or when the terminal has been removed and installed during exchange, etc.

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sound or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move with the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift lever to P when parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction:

●Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) under the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.
- Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid battery (traction battery), under the rear seats, when the hybrid system is started or stopped.
●Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling.

●Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.

● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed or as the accelerator pedal is released.

●Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.

● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent. (→P. 83)

■ Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System

In the following cases, the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System may be difficult for surrounding people to hear.

In very noisy areas
In the wind or the rain

■Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 569)

Hybrid system precautions

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

① Warning label
② Service plug
③ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
④ High voltage cables (orange)

⑤ Electric motor (traction motor)
⑥ Power control unit
⑦ Air conditioning compressor

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent

There is an air intake vent under the right side of the rear seat for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent becomes blocked, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat, leading to a reduction in the hybrid battery (traction battery) output.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a grille and seat, with no visible text or symbols

Emergency shut off system

When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

Hybrid warning message

A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (→P. 507)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In this case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light ( P. 500) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The standard amount of fuel is about 2.3 gal. [8.8 L, 1.9 Imp. gal.] when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is inclined.)

Electromagnetic waves

● High voltage parts and cables on hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.
- Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.

■ Starting the hybrid system in an extremely cold environment (AXVH70 model\*)

When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22^ [-30^] ) under the influence of the outside temperature, it may not be possible to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) increases due to the outside temperature increase etc.

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 545)

WARNING

■High voltage precautions

This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.

● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors.

● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

- Do not touch the service plug located under the right side of the rear seat. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

Technical line drawing of a car front panel with a close-up inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

● Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and turn the hybrid system off.
- Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
- If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
- If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.
- If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with front wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. ( P. 493)
Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
- If electrolyte is leaking from the hybrid battery (traction battery), do not approach the vehicle.

Even in the unlikely event that the hybrid battery (traction battery) is damaged, the internal construction of the battery will prevent a large amount of electrolyte from leaking out. However, any electrolyte that does leak out will give off a vapor. This vapor is an irritant to skin and eyes and could cause acute poisoning if inhaled.

▶ AXVH70 model*

• Do not touch the hybrid battery (traction battery) if liquid is leaking from or adhering to it. If electrolyte (carbonic-based organic electrolyte) from the hybrid battery (traction battery) comes into contact with the eyes or skin, it could cause blindness or skin wounds. In the unlikely event that it comes into contact with the eyes or skin, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water, and seek immediate medical attention.
• Do not bring burning or high-temperature items close to the electrolyte. The electrolyte may ignite and cause a fire.

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 545)

▶ AXVH71 models*

- If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 545)

WARNING

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

●AXVH70 model ^* : Your vehicle contains a sealed lithium-ion battery.
● Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Toyota dealer. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or serious injury:

• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.
• The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.

When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers.

- If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 545)

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent

Make sure not to block the air intake vent with anything, such as a seat cover, plastic cover, or luggage. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.
- When dust etc. has accumulated in the air intake vent, clean it with a vacuum cleaner to prevent the vent from clogging.
- Do not get water or foreign materials in the air intake vent as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
- Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
There is a filter installed to the air intake vent. When the filter remains noticeably dirty even after cleaning the air intake vent, filter cleaning or replacement is recommended. When cleaning the filter, refer to P. 465.

Immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

CTH13BT060

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
- If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Alarm

The alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

●A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
●The trunk is opened in any way other than using the entry function or wireless remote control.
●The hood is opened.

Setting the alarm system

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

CTH13BT060

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:

• Unlock the doors.
• Open the trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.
  ●Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

●For Canada: The doors are unlocked using the mechanical key.

Diagram of a car with a flag and arrow, no readable text or symbols present

● Except for Canada: The trunk is opened using the mechanical key.

CTH13BT004

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door or the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.

Line drawing of a person inside a car, showing seatbelt and window (no text or symbols)

●The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (→P. 533)

Illustration of a person handling a container inside a car (no text or symbols visible)

■Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:

• When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
  ● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
  ●When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Instrument cluster

2

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators 94

Gauges and meters ..... 100

Multi-information display (4.2-inch display) 104

Multi-information display (7-inch display) 117

Head-up display 136

Energy monitor/consumption screen...... 142

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

4.2-inch display

BRAKE ABS PARK RCTA HOLD CTH20BT290

7-inch display

BMW ABS PARK BRAKE PARK HOLD CTH20BT291

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle's systems.

*1(U.S.A.)	Brake system warning light (→P. 497)	*2	Inappropriate pedal operation warning light (→P. 498)
*1(Canada)(Red)	Brake system warning light (→P. 497)	(U.S.A.)	Parking brake indicator (→P. 498)
*1(Yellow)	Brake system warning light (→P. 497)	(Canada)	Parking brake indicator (→P. 498)
*1(U.S.A.)	Malfunction indicator lamp (→P. 497)	*1,3	Brake hold operated indicator (→P. 498)
*1(Canada)	Malfunction indicator lamp (→P. 497)	*1(Red/yellow)	Electric power steering system warning light (→P. 498)
*1	SRS warning light (→P. 497)	(Yellow)	LTA indicator (→P. 499)
*1(U.S.A.)	ABS warning light (→P. 498)	*1(Flashes or illuminates)	PCS warning light (→P. 499)
*1(Canada)	ABS warning light (→P. 498)	*1,3(If equipped)	PKSB OFF indicator (→P. 499)

Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (→P. 499)

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (→P. 500)

RCD OFF indicator (→P. 500)

Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights (→P. 500)

Slip indicator ( P. 500)

Master warning light ( P. 500)

Low fuel level warning light ( P. 500)

Tire pressure warning light ( P. 501)

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
*3: This light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*4: This light illuminates on the center panel.

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.

Turn signal indicator ( P. 222)

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator ( P. 287)

Headlight indicator ( P. 230)

Cruise control "SET" indicator (→P. 287)

(U.S.A.)

Tail light indicator ( P. 230)

*1,2

PCS warning light ( P. 252)

(Canada)

^* 1,2

Headlight high beam indicator ( P. 231)

PKSB OFF indicator ( P. 341)

(If equipped)

*1

Automatic High Beam indicator ( P. 234)

LTA indicator ( P. 276)

(White)

AGC (Auto Glide Control) indicator ( P. 356)

LTA indicator ( P. 253, 276)

(Green)

Parking brake indicator ( P. 223)

*3

(U.S.A.)

LTA indicator ( P. 276)

(Yellow)

Parking brake indicator ( P. 223)

*1, 3

Slip indicator ( P. 304)

^* 1

Brake hold operated indicator ( P. 227)

*1,2

VSC OFF indicator (→P. 305)

*1

Brake hold standby indicator ( P. 227)

BSM

(If equipped)

“BSM” indicator ( P. 310)

Cruise control indicator ( P. 287)

“RCTA” indicator (→P. 326)

(If equipped)

*4,5(If equipped)	BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) outside rear view mirror indicators(→P. 310)		"READY" indicator(→P. 206)
*1,6	"AIRBAG ON/OFF"indicator (→P.47)		EV indicator (→P. 80)
*6	Security indicator(→P. 89, 90)		EV drive mode indicator(→P. 213)
(If equipped)	Intuitive parking assistOFF indicator (→P. 317)	*7	Low outside temperature indicator (→P. 100)
SPORT	"SPORT" indicator(→P. 355)	RCD OFF(If equipped)	RCD OFF indicator(→P. 335)
ECOMODE	"ECO MODE" indicator(→P. 355)

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*2: This light turns on when the system is off.

*3: This light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

*4: These indicators will illuminate in the following situations to indicate that the system initial check is being performed:

• When the BSM function or RCTA function is enabled and the power switch is turned to ON mode.
• When the power switch is ON mode and the BSM function is enabled.
• When the power switch is ON mode and the RCTA function is enabled. (At this time, a buzzer will also sound).

The indicators will turn off after a few seconds. If the indicators do not illuminate or turn off, or if a buzzer does not sound when the RCTA function is enabled, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*5: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*6: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*7: When the outside temperature is approximately 37^ (3°C) or lower, this indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

WARNING

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning lights not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

Gauges and meters

4.2-inch display

1 2 3 4 68° 1000 min 5 6 7 8 CTH20BT280

7-inch display

1 4 5 68°F P 020 1000m/s 7 8 CTH20BT281US

① Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level ( P. 102)

② Shift position ( P. 216)

③ Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37^ ( 3^ ) or lower.

④ Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( P. 104, 117)

Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction ( P. 507)

⑤ Speedometer

⑥ Fuel gauge

Displays the fuel level. In the following situations, the actual fuel level may not be displayed correctly:

• After refueling only a small amount (approximately 5 L or less)
- When stopped on a hill or other slope
- When driving on a slope or around a curve

⑦ Odometer and trip meter ( P. 114, 133)

⑧ Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

① Darker
② Brighter

• The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted individually for day mode and night mode*.
• If the brightness is adjusted when the surroundings are bright and the tail lights are on (day mode brightness adjustment), the brightness level of night mode will be adjusted at the same time.

*: Day mode and night mode: →P. 102

CTH20BT156 ① ②

■The meters and display illuminate when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■Brightness of the meters (day mode and night mode)

●The brightness of the meters is changed between day mode and night mode.

- Day mode: When the tail lights are off or when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright

• Night mode: When the tail lights are on and the surrounding area is dark

- When in night mode, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the meters are set to the maximum brightness level.

Hybrid System Indicator

① READY OFF area

Shows that the hybrid system is not operating.

② Charge area

Shows regenerative charging.

③ Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.

④ Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

⑤ Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

CTH20BT282 ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ CHG OER ECO PWR

- By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.

- Charge area indicates "regeneration" * status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the battery.

*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

The Hybrid System Indicator will not operate in the following situations:

●The "READY" indicator is not illuminated.

●The shift lever is in P. R or N position.

Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc. There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.

■Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])
- When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
- When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■Fuel gauge and driving range display

The fuel gauge and driving range display are linked. If the fuel gauge and driving range display do not update after refueling a small amount, they can be updated by performing the following procedure:

1 Stop the vehicle on a level surface.
Wait until the fuel in the fuel tank stabilizes.
2 Press the ODO/TRIP switch to change the odometer and trip meter display to the odometer.
3 Turn the power switch off.
4 While pressing and holding the ODO/TRIP switch, turn the power switch to ON mode.
5 Continue holding the ODO/TRIP switch for approximately 5 seconds.
Release the switch when the odometer begins blinking.
Updating will be complete when the odometer blinks for approximately 5 seconds and then returns to the normal display.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 537)

Multi-information display (4.2-inch display)

Summary of functions

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi-information display can also be used to change the display settings and other settings.

⑥ ① P ② < i > / > ③ ④ 1000 mile ⑤ ODO ODO TRIP ⑦ ⑧ CTH20BT296

① Shift position ( P. 216)
② Menu icon display area

Displays the following items.

When a menu icon is not selected, the outside temperature and clock are displayed.

• Menu icons (→P. 106)
• Outside temperature (→P. 100)
• Clock *

*: For clock settings, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

③ Content display area

A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Additionally, warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.

• Menu icon content (→P. 106)
• Suggestion function ( P. 114)
• Warning message (→P. 507)

④ Odometer/trip meter ( P. 114)
⑤ Indicators ( P. 94)

⑥ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P. 282)
⑦ “ODO/TRIP” switch ( P. 105)
⑧ Meter control switches ( P. 105)

Using the multi-information display

◆ Using the content display area

The content display area is operated using the meter control switches.

① Scroll screens*, change the displayed content* and move the cursor
② Press: Enter/Set Press and hold: Reset
③ Return to the previous screen

Pressing and holding the switch will display the first screen of the selected menu icon.

① ② ③ CK ④ CTH20BT253

④ Call sending/receiving and history display

Linked with the hands-free system, sending or receiving call is displayed. For details regarding the hands-free system, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

*: When the screen can be scrolled or different content can be displayed, a mark, such as an arrow, will be displayed to suggest which switch to operate.

◆ Using the odometer/trip meter

Items in this area are operated using the "ODO/TRIP" switch.

Press: Change displayed item

Each time the switch is pressed, the displayed item will be changed.

Press and hold: Reset

Display the desired trip meter and press and hold the switch to reset the trip meter.

CDO TRIP CTH20BT011

Menu icons

Select a menu icon to display its content.

Drive information ( P. 107)

Select to display various drive data.

Audio system-linked display

Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the meter control switches.

Driving assist system information

Select to display the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 287)
  • LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P. 267)
  • RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P. 282)

Warning message display (→P. 507)

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected.

Settings display ( P. 109)

Select to change the meter display settings and other settings.

Drive information (i

■Trip (after start)

① Average fuel economy*
Displays the average fuel consumption since hybrid system start.
② Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since hybrid system start.
③ Elapsed time

Displays the time elapsed since hybrid system start.

①—AVG. 34.0 MPG ②—AVG. 25 MPH ③——————0:20 CTH20BT110US

*: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference only.

■ Total (after reset)

① Current fuel consumption
Displays the instantaneous current fuel consumption.
② Average fuel economy ^1,2
Displays the average fuel consumption since the display was reset.
③ Average vehicle speed/ Elapsed time ^1

Displays the average vehicle speed since reset or elapsed time since reset, as selected in ⚙→P. 109)

*1: Pressing and holding will reset the average fuel consumption and average vehicle speed/elapsed time.
*2: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference only.

■Tank (after refuel)

① Driving range ^1,2 Displays the driving range with remaining fuel.
② Average fuel economy ^1,3 Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was refueled.

① 125 miles ② AVG. 34.0 MPG CTH20BT112US

*1: When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display may not be updated.
*2: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
*3: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference only.

■ Energy monitor

→P. 142

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

■Tire pressure (vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function)

→P. 445

Blank (No items)

Displays no drive information contents.

Settings display

◆Changing settings

Use the meter control switches on the steering wheel to change settings.

1 Press or to select.
2 Operate the switches to select a desired item.
3 Change the setting by referring to the message displayed on the screen.

Setting items

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P. 267)

The following LTA system settings can be changed:

Item Settings	Details
Lane center	On	Select to enable/disable the lane centering function.
	Off
Alert sensitivity	High	Select to set the warning sensi-tivity.
	Std.
Sway warning	On	Select to enable/disable the vehi-cle sway warning.
	Off
Sway sensitivity	High	Select to set the vehicle sway warning sensitivity.
	Std.
	Low

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (→P. 252)

The following pre-collision system settings can be changed:

Item Settings	Details
PCS	On		Select to enable/disable the pre-collision system.
	Off
Warning sensitivity		Early	Select to change the warning timing.
		Middle
		Late

■ DRCC (Dynamic Radar Cruise Control) (→P. 287)

Item Settings	Details
Curve speed reduction		Strong	Select to change the vehicle speed reduction strength.
		Weak
	Off

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function (if equipped) (→P. 310)

Item Settings	Details
BSM	On	Select to enable/disable the Blind Spot Monitor function.
	Off

■RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function (if equipped) (→P. 326)

Item Settings	Details
RCTA	On	Select to enable/disable the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
	Off

■ RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function (if equipped) ( P. 335)

Item Settings	Details
RCD	On	Select to enable/disable the rear camera detection.
	Off

RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P. 282)

The following RSA settings can be changed:

Item Settings	Details
RSA	On	Select to enable/disable the RSA.
	Off
Notification method	Excess speed notification	Select a notification method used to warn the driver if the vehicle speed exceeds the speed displayed on the speed limit sign on the multi-information display. Available methods:• No notification• Display only• Display and buzzer
	Other notifications	Select a notification method used to warn the driver if the system detects the vehicle approaching to the no-entry road when a do not enter sign is displayed on the multi-information display. Available methods:• No notification• Display only• Display and buzzer
Excess speed notification level	5 mph (10 km/h)	Select a speed threshold over which the excess speed notification will start to operate when a speed limit sign is displayed on the multi-information display.
	3 mph (5 km/h)
	1 mph (2 km/h)

Vehicle settings

Item Settings	Details
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped) (→P. 310)
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness	Bright	Select to change the brightness of the outside rear view mirror indicators.
	Dim
Notification timing for presence of approaching vehicle (sensitivity)	Early	Select to change the notification timing for an approaching vehicle.
	Middle
	Late
	Only when vehicle detected in blind spot
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) (if equipped) (→P. 326)
RCTA buzzer volume	1 (Low)	Select to change the volume of the RCTA buzzer.
	2 (Medium)
	3 (Loud)
TPWS (Tire pressure warning system) (→P. 445)
Set pressure (tire pressure warning system initialization)		Select to initialize the tire pressure warning system. To perform initialization, press and hold the switch.Before performing initialization, make sure to adjust the inflation pressure of each tire to the specified level. (→P. 446)
Change wheel (change the tire pressure warning system sensor ID code set)(vehicles without a tire inflation pressure display function)		Select to change the tire pressure warning system sensor ID code set.To enable this function, a second set of tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes must be registered by a Toyota dealer.For information regarding changing the registered ID code set, contact your Toyota dealer.(→P. 448)
Change wheel (register tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes) (vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function)		Select to register the ID codes of the tire pressure sensors to the tire pressure warning system. To register the ID codes, press and hold the switch. (→P. 448)
Rear seat reminder (→P. 159)	On	Select to enable/disable the rear seat reminder.
	Off
Scheduled maintenance display
Maintenance data reset		Select to reset the message indicating maintenance is required, after the required maintenance is performed. (→P. 420)

■Meter settings

Item Settings	Details
Language		Select to change the language displayed.
Units		Select to change the units of measure displayed.
(EV indicator)	On	Select to enable/disable the EV indicator. (→P. 80)
	Off
Drive information (total [after reset])	Average vehicle speed	Select to change the display between average speed/elapsed time.
	Elapsed time
Pop-up display	Incoming calls	Select to enable/disable the pop-up display.
	Brightness adjustment
Default setting		Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting.

Odometer/trip meter

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

■Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the "ODO/TRIP" switch.

Suggestion function

Displays suggestions to the driver in the following situations. To select a response to a displayed suggestion, use the meter control switches.

The suggestion function can be turned on/off.

■ Suggestion to turn off the headlights

If the headlights are left on for a certain amount of time after the power switch has been turned off, if the headlight switch is in the "AUTO" position, a suggestion message will be displayed asking if you wish to turn the headlights off. To turn the headlights off, select "Yes".

If a front door is opened after the power switch is turned off, this suggestion message will not be displayed.

■Suspension of the settings display

• Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe place.
• If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.

■ Tire pressure (vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function)

• It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
• “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.
  ● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 109, 569)

WARNING

■Caution for use while driving

• When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.
• Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

■Cautions during setting up the display

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■While setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.

Multi-information display (7-inch display)

Summary of functions

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi-information display can also be used to change the display settings and other settings.

1 2 3 4 12:00 12PH 40 0 MPH 5 6 7 11 Outside 68°F P 0DO 1000 miles 10 9 8 ODO TRIP 12 13 CTH20BT285US

① Indicators ( P. 94)
② Driving assist system status display area

Displays the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 287)
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P. 267)

③ Speed limit display (vehicles with a navigation system)

(U.S.A. only)/RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) (→P. 282)

④ Clock

For clock settings, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

⑤ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P. 282)

⑥ Speedometer

The speedometer display can be enabled/disabled in ☐ on the multi-information display. (→P. 126)

⑦ Content display area

A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Additionally, warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.

• Menu icon content (→P. 120)
• Suggestion function ( P. 133)
• Warning message (→P. 507)

⑧ Odometer/trip meter ( P. 133)

⑨ Shift position ( P. 216)

⑩ Outside temperature ( P. 100)

⑪ Menu icons ( P. 120)

⑫ “ODO/TRIP” switch ( P. 119)

⑬ Meter control switches ( P. 119)

Using the multi-information display

◆ Using the content display area

The content display area is operated using the meter control switches.

① Scroll screens*, change the displayed content* and move the cursor
② Press: Enter/Set Press and hold: Reset/Display the next screen
③ Return to the previous screen

Pressing and holding the switch will display the first screen of the selected menu icon.

① ② ③ OK ④ CTH20BT253

④ Call sending/receiving and history display

Linked with the hands-free system, sending or receiving call is displayed. For details regarding the hands-free system, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

*: When the screen can be scrolled or different content can be displayed, a mark, such as an arrow, will be displayed to suggest which switch to operate.

◆ Using the odometer/trip meter

Items in this area are operated using the "ODO/TRIP" switch.

Press: Change displayed item

Each time the switch is pressed, the displayed item will be changed.

Press and hold: Reset

Display the desired trip meter and press and hold the switch to reset the trip meter.

ODO TRIP CTH20BT011

Menu icons

Select a menu icon to display its content.

Warning message display ( P. 507)

This menu icon will be displayed only when a warning message can be displayed.

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected.

Eco-friendly driving information ( P. 121)

Select to display fuel consumption data in various forms.

Driving assist system information

Select to perform the following:

Display the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 287)
  • LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P. 267)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P. 282)

Display the following navigation system-linked information (if equipped):

• Route guidance
• Compass display

Audio system-linked display

Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the meter control switches.

Vehicle information

Select to perform the following:

Display the following information:

• Energy monitor (→P. 142)
• Tire inflation pressure (→P. 445)

Enable/Disable the following systems:

• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) ( P. 317)
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function ( P.310)
  • RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function (→P. 326)

This function can also be enabled/disabled on

Settings display ( P. 126)

Select to change the meter display settings and other settings.

Eco-friendly driving information

■Fuel consumption

① Current fuel consumption
Displays the instantaneous current fuel consumption.
② Average fuel economy (after start)
Displays the average fuel consumption since hybrid system start.*1

① ② Trip Total 34.0 60 MPG 0 20 40 4 5 Total AVG. 25 MPH 125 miles ③ ④ CTH20BT113US

③ Driving range

Displays the driving range with remaining fuel. ^*2,3

④ Gadget*4

The following items can be displayed by changing the settings for gadget content and fuel economy type on P. 126)

Displayable item		Content
Gadget content	Fuel economy type
Average vehicle speed	Trip(after start)	Displays the average vehicle speed since hybrid system start.
	Total(after reset)	Displays the average vehicle speed since the display was reset.*5
Distance	Trip(after start)	Displays the distance driven since vehicle start.
	Total(after reset)	Displays the distance driven since the display was reset.*5
Elapsed time	Trip(after start)	Displays the elapsed time since hybrid system start.
	Total(after reset)	Displays the elapsed time since the display was reset.*5

⑤ Average fuel economy

Displayed item (listed below) can be changed on the fuel economy type screen of ☐→P. 126)

●Total (after reset)

Displays the average fuel consumption since the display was reset. ^*1, 5

●Tank (after refuel)

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was refueled. ^*1,2

*1: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference only.
*2: When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display may not be updated.
*3: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
*4: The default setting is no display.
*5: This display can be reset by pressing and holding while it is displayed.

Eco guide

The Eco guide displays a guide for eco-friendly acceleration and scores which represent an evaluation of how the vehicle has been driven ecologically in different states.

① ECO Accelerator Guidance
② Eco score

ECOZone Start Cruise Stop Score 70 CTH20BT124US

●ECO Accelerator Guidance

① Eco area

Indicates that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

② Power area

Indicates that the Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving, etc.)

① ② ③ ECO Zone ④ CTH20BT125US

③ Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
④ Zone of Eco acceleration

Suggests a range in which Eco-friendly acceleration can be performed.

The zone of Eco acceleration changes according to situations, such as starting off or cruising.

Eco-friendly acceleration can be achieved by keeping the Eco driving ratio based on acceleration bar within the zone of Eco acceleration. ( P. 194)

●Eco score

The following 3 Eco driving methods are evaluated in 5 levels: Smooth start-off acceleration, driving without sudden acceleration, and smooth stopping. When the vehicle is stopped, an Eco score out of 100 points will be displayed.

① Eco start status
② Eco cruise status
③ Eco stop status
④ Score result

① ② Start Cruise Stop ③ Score 70 ④ CTH20BT126US

How to read the bar display:

Not yet evaluated Low High

• After the hybrid system is started, the Eco score will not be displayed until the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
• The Eco score will be reset each time the hybrid system is started.
• When the hybrid system is stopped, the total score of the current trip will be displayed.

■Speedometer display/Driving range

① Speedometer display

Displays the vehicle speed.

② Driving range

Displays the driving range with remaining fuel.

When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display may not be updated.

Digital Speed 40 MPH Distance to Empty 125 miles ① ② CTH20BT324US

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

Settings display

◆Changing settings

Use the meter control switches on the steering wheel to change settings.

1 Press or to select.

2 Operate the switches to select a desired item.

3 Press or press and hold . OK

The available settings will differ depending on if is pressed or pressed and held. Follow the instructions on the display.

Setting items

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P. 267)

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item Settings	Details
Lane center	On	Select to enable/disable the lane centering function.
	Off
Alert sensitivity	High	Select to set the warning sensi-tivity.
	Std.
Sway warning	On	Select to enable/disable the vehi-cle sway warning.
	Off
Sway sensitivity	High	Select to set the vehicle sway warning sensitivity.
	Std.
	Low

PCS (Pre-Collision System) ( P. 252)

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item Settings	Details
PCS	On		Select to enable/disable the pre-collision system.
	Off
Warning sensitivity		Early	Select to change the warning timing.
		Middle
		Late

DRCC (Dynamic radar cruise control) (→P. 287)

Press and hold to change the settings of the following item:

Item Settings	Details
Curve speed reduction		Strong	Select to change the vehicle speed reduction strength.
		Weak
	Off

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ( P. 310)

Press to enable/disable the Blind Spot Monitor function.

Item Settings	Details
BSM	On	Select to enable/disable the Blind Spot Monitor function.
	Off

Press and hold to change the settings of the following item:

Item Settings	Details
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness	Bright		Select to change the brightness of the outside rear view mirror indicators.
	Dim
Notification timing for presence of approaching vehicle (sensitivity)		Early	Select to change the notification timing for an approaching vehicle.
		Middle
		Late
	Only when vehicle detected in blind spot

RCTA RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) (→P. 326)

Press to enable/disable the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.

Item Settings	Details
RCTA	On	Select to enable/disable the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
	Off

Press and hold to change the settings of the following item:

Item Settings	Details
RCTA buzzer volume	1 (Low)	Select to change the volume of the RCTA buzzer.
	2 (Medium)
	3 (Loud)

■ RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function ( P. 335)

Press to enable/disable the rear camera detection function.

Item Settings	Details
RCD	On	Select to enable/disable the rear camera detection.
	Off

PKSB (Parking Support Brake) (if equipped) (→P. 340)

Press to enable/disable the Parking Support Brake.

Item Settings	Details
PKSB	On	Select to enable/disable the Parking Support Brake system.
	Off

Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) (→P. 317)

Press to enable/disable the Intuitive parking assist.

Item Settings	Details
Intuitive parking assist	On	Select to enable/disable the intuitive parking assist.
	Off

Press and hold to change the settings of the following item:

Item Settings	Details
Volume	1 (Low)	Select to change the volume of the intuitive parking assist buzzer.
	2 (Medium)
	3 (Loud)

HUD (Head-up display) (if equipped) ( P. 136)

Press to enable/disable the head-up display.

Item Settings	Details
HUD	On	Select to enable/disable the head-up display.
	Off

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item Settings	Details
HUD Brightness/Position		Select to adjust the brightness/ position of the head-up display. • Press the / switch to adjust the display brightness. • Press the / switch to adjust the display position.
HUD Driving support	Tachometer set- tings	Select to change the display between the following: • Hybrid System Indicator • Tachometer • No content
	Navigation sys- tem (if equipped)	Select to enable/disable head-up display content.
	Driving Assist
	Compass (if equipped)
Rotation		Select to adjust the angle of the head-up display. Press the < / > switch to adjust the display angle.

RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P. 282)

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item Settings	Details
RSA	On	Select to enable/disable the RSA.
	Off
Notification method	Excess speed notification	Select a notification method used to warn the driver if the vehicle speed exceeds the speed displayed on the speed limit sign on the multi-information display. Available methods:• No notification• Display only• Display and buzzer
	Other notifications	Select a notification method used to warn the driver if the system detects the vehicle approaching to the no-entry road when a do not enter sign is displayed on the multi-information display. Available methods:• No notification• Display only• Display and buzzer
Excess speed notification level	5 mph (10 km/h)	Select a speed threshold over which the excess speed notification will start to operate when a speed limit sign is displayed on the multi-information display.
	3 mph (5 km/h)
	1 mph (2 km/h)

■ Vehicle settings

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item Settings	Details
TPWS (Tire pressure warning system) (→P. 445)
Set pressure (tire pressure warning sys-tem initialization)		Select to initialize the tire pres-sure warning system. To per-form initialization, press and hold the switch.Before performing initialization, make sure to adjust the inflation pressure of each tire to the spec-ified level. (→P. 446)
Change wheel (register tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes)		Select to register the ID codes of the tire pressure sensors to the tire pressure warning system. To register the ID codes, press and hold the switch.(→P. 448)
Rear seat reminder (→P. 159)	On	Select to enable/disable the rear seat reminder.
	Off
Scheduled maintenance display
Maintenance data reset		Select to reset the message indi-cating maintenance is required, after the required maintenance is performed. (→P. 420)

■ Meter settings

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item Settings	Details
Language		Select to change the language displayed.
Units		Select to change the units of measure displayed.
(EV indicator)	On	Select to enable/disable the EV indicator. (→P. 80)
	Off
Speedometer	On	Select to enable/disable the speedometer display.
	Off
Gadget content	Off No display
	Average vehicle speed	Select to turn the display of a gadget.
	Distance
	Elapsed time
Fuel economy type	Trip (after start)*1	Select to change the average fuel consumption display and an item to be displayed as gadget.
	Total (after reset)
	Tank (after refuel)*2
Multi-information display off		Select to turn the multi-information display off.To turn the multi-information display on again, press any direction switch ( ∧ / √ / < / > ).
Pop-up display	Intersection guidance (if equipped)	Select to enable/disable the pop-up display.
	Incoming calls
	Brightness adjustment
Default setting		Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting.

*1: Selecting this item will only change the gadget.
^*2 : Selecting this item will turn the display of the gadget off.

Odometer/trip meter

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

■Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the "ODO/TRIP" switch.

Suggestion function

Displays suggestions to the driver in the following situations. To select a response to a displayed suggestion, use the meter control switches.

The suggestion function can be turned on/off.

■ Suggestion to turn off the headlights

If the headlights are left on for a certain amount of time after the power switch has been turned off, if the headlight switch is in the "AUTO" position, a suggestion message will be displayed asking if you wish to turn the headlights off. To turn the headlights off, select "Yes".

If a front door is opened after the power switch is turned off, this suggestion message will not be displayed.

■The Eco guide will not operate when

The Eco guide will not operate in the following situations:

●The Hybrid System Indicator is not operating.
● The vehicle is being driven using the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.

■Suspension of the settings display

• Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe place.
• If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.

Tire pressure

• It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
• “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.
  ● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 126, 569)

WARNING

■Caution for use while driving

• When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.
• Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

■Cautions during setting up the display

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■While setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.

Head-up display\*

Summary of functions

The head-up display is linked to the meters and navigation system (if equipped) and projects a variety of information in front of the driver, such as the current vehicle speed.

100ft D SPEED LIMIT 40 35 MPH CHG ECO PWR ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ CTH20BT272US

① Driving assist system status/navigation system-linked display area (if equipped) ( P. 138)

The following pop-up displays will be displayed in certain situations:

• Pre-collision warning (pre-collision system)
• Alert from the Parking Support Brake system (if equipped)

② Shift position/speed limit/RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area

• Shift position (→P. 216)
  • Speed limit (vehicles with a navigation system) (U.S.A. only)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) display (if equipped) ( P. 282)

③ Vehicle speed display
④ Hybrid System Indicator/Tachometer ( P. 138)
⑤ Information display area ( P. 139)

The following pop-up displays will be displayed in certain situations:

• Warning/message
• Hands-free system status
  • Audio system operation status

Using the head-up display

Select 📂 on the multi-information display (→P. 126) and then .

◆Enabling/disabling the head-up display

Press to enable/disable the head-up display.

◆Changing the head-up display settings

Press and hold to change the following settings:

■Hybrid System Indicator/Tachometer

Select to display Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer/no content.

■Display brightness/position

Select to adjust the brightness and position of the head-up display.

■Display content

Select to enable/disable the following items:

• Route guidance to destination (if equipped)
• Driving assist system status
• Compass (if equipped)

■ Display angle

Select to adjust the angle of the head-up display.

Driving assist system status/navigation system-linked display area (if equipped)

◆Driving assist system status display

Displays the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 287)
  • LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P. 267)
  • RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P. 282)
• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) ( P. 317)

◆Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped)

Displays the following items, which are linked to the navigation system:

■Street name

When the navigation system is performing route guidance, the name of the next street will be displayed on the top of the display area.

■Route guidance to destination

Displayed when the navigation system is performing route guidance. When approaching an intersection, an arrow will be displayed to indicate the suggested direction of travel.

■Compass

Displays the direction of travel.

Hybrid System Indicator/Tachometer

■Hybrid System Indicator

① Charge area
② Hybrid Eco area
③ Eco area
④ Power area

Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the meter (Hybrid System Indicator). For details, refer to P. 102.

① ③ ④ CHG ECO PWR ② CTH20BT114US

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Information display area

Displays the following items in the appropriate situation:

■Warning/Message

●Alert from the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
●Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
●Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control

message

Displayed when a suggestion/advice pop-up display is displayed on the multi-information display. ( P. 133)

message

Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display. ( P. 507)

●Outside temperature

Displayed in the following situations:

• When the power switch is turned to ON mode
• When the low outside temperature indicator is flashing

Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display. For details, refer to the explanation of the outside temperature display on the multi-information display. ( P. 100)

■ Hands-free system status

Displayed when the hands-free system is operated.

■ Audio system operation status

Displayed when the audio system is operated.

Head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark or hard to see when viewed through sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses.

Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.

■Display brightness

The brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted on one multi-information display. Also, it is automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness.

■Enabling/disabling of the head-up display

If the head-up display is disabled, it will remain disabled when the power switch is turned off then back to ON mode.

■Street name display (vehicles with a navigation system)

Only street names which are included in the map data will be displayed.

WARNING

■Before using the head-up display

• Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image's position or brightness may obstruct the driver's view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Do not continuously look at the head-up display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■Caution for changing settings of the head-up display

As the hybrid system needs to be operating while changing the settings of the head-up display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to components

• Do not place any drinks near the head-up display projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result.
• Do not place anything on or put stickers onto the head-up display projector. Doing so could interrupt head-up display indications.
• Do not touch the inside of the head-up display projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into the projector. Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

When changing the settings of the head-up display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while the changing the settings of the head-up display.

Energy monitor/consumption screen

The state of the hybrid system can be viewed on the multi-information display and navigation or multimedia system screen.

The energy monitor and fuel consumption screen can be displayed on the “Home” screen of the multimedia screen.

System components

① Audio system screen
② Multi-information display
③ Meter control switches ( P. 105, 119)

① ② ③ CTH20BT392

Energy monitor

The energy monitor can be used to check the vehicle drive status, hybrid system operation status and energy regeneration status.

■Display procedure

▶ Multi-information display
Operate the meter control switches on the steering wheel to select the energy monitor display.
▶ Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles without Data Communication Module)

1 Press the "MENU" button.

2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.

If a screen other than “Energy monitor” is displayed, select “Energy”.

▶ Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles with Data Communication Module)/Premium Audio

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "ECO" on the "Information" screen.

If a screen other than “Energy monitor” is displayed, select “Energy”.

■Reading the display

The arrows will appear in accordance with the energy flow.

When there is no energy flow, arrows will not be displayed.

The color of the arrows will change as follows.

Green: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is regenerated or charged.

Yellow: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is in use.

Red: When the gasoline engine is in use.

▶ Multi-information display

Vehicles with 4.2-inch display: Vehicles with 7-inch display:

graph TD
    A["Wheel"] --> B["Battery"]
    B --> C["Device Unit"]
    C --> D["Recycle Loop"]
    D --> E["Motor"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

① ② ③ CTH20BT394

The image shows the arrows as an example. The actual display will vary depending on conditions.

① Gasoline engine
② Hybrid battery (traction battery)
③ Front tires

▶ Audio system screen

① Gasoline engine
② Electric motor (traction motor)
③ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
④ Front tires

① ② ③ ④ CTH20BT396

The image shows the arrows as an example. The actual display will vary depending on conditions.

▶ Audio system screen ("Home" screen)

① Gasoline engine
② Hybrid battery (traction battery)
③ Front tires

③ ① ② CTH20BT397

The image shows the arrows as an example. The actual display will vary depending on conditions.

■Remaining charge amount warning of hybrid battery (traction battery)

●The buzzer sounds intermittently when the hybrid battery (traction battery) remains without charging while the shift lever is in N, or the remaining charge amount drops below a certain level. If the remaining charge amount drops further, the buzzer sounds continuously.
- When a warning message is shown on the multi-information display and the buzzer sounds, follow the instructions displayed on the screen to perform troubleshooting.

Fuel consumption screen

■Trip information

▶ Audio (vehicles without Data Communication Module) or Audio Plus (vehicles without Data Communication Module)

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.

If the "Energy Monitor" or "History" screen is displayed, select "Trip Information".

▶ Audio (vehicles with Data Communication Module), Audio Plus (vehicles with Data Communication Module) and Premium Audio

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "ECO" on the "Information" screen.

If "Energy Monitor" or "History" screen is displayed, select "Trip Information".

① Resetting the consumption data
② Displays the average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started
③ Displays the elapsed time since the hybrid system was started

④ Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
⑤ Cruising range
⑥ Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes

One symbol indicates 30 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown.

The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

⑦ Current fuel consumption

Trip Information 8:34 Avg. Spd. After Start 12 MPH Elapsed Time After Start 02:03 Range 26 miles Regenerated = 30Wh MFG 50 40 20 10 5 0 Current History Energy Clear CTA20BT044US

History

▶ Audio (vehicles without Data Communication Module) or Audio Plus (vehicles without Data Communication Module)

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.

If the "Energy Monitor" or "Trip Information" screen is displayed, select "History".

▶ Audio (vehicles with Data Communication Module), Audio Plus (vehicles with Data Communication Module) and Premium Audio

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "ECO" on the "Information" screen.

If "Energy Monitor" or "Trip Information" screen is displayed, select "History".

① Resetting the past record data
② Best past fuel consumption
③ Current fuel economy
④ Previous fuel consumption record

▶ Audio or Audio Plus

Displays the daily average fuel consumption. (Instead of the date, "Trip 1" through "Trip 5" will be displayed.)

▶ Premium Audio

Displays the daily average fuel consumption.

⑤ Updating the average fuel consumption data

Displays a maximum of five past record of the average fuel consumption.

The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■ Resetting the consumption data

Selecting “Clear” on the “Trip Information” screen will reset the fuel consumption and the regenerated energy for the past 15 minutes. Selecting “Clear” on the “History” screen will reset the past records and best past fuel consumption. Selecting “Yes” on the following screen will confirm resetting of all the data.

Operation of each component

3

3-1. Key information

Keys 150

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Doors 154

Trunk.... 160

Smart key system ...... 164

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats 171

Rear seats.... 173

Head restraints.... 175

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel 177

Inside rear view mirror ..... 179

Outside rear view mirrors.... 181

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows 183

Moon roof.... 186

Keys

The keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

① Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system (→P. 164)
• Operating the wireless remote control function (→P. 150)

② Mechanical keys
③ Key number plate

① ② ③ CTH31BT002

Wireless remote control

① Locks all the doors ( P. 154)
② Unlocks all the doors ( P. 154)
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

③ Opens the windows ^1 and the moon roof ^1,2 ( P. 154)
④ Opens the trunk ( P. 160)
⑤ Sounds the alarm ( P. 151)

*1: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

*2: If equipped

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ CTH31BT004

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, slide the release lever and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.

CTH31BT006

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P. 527)

Panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

Illustration of a car accident with a manified figure falling, and a mobile phone emitting sound waves (no text or symbols)

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any button on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■Conditions affecting operation

→P. 167

Electronic key battery depletion

●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
- If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops.
As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 470)
- The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
- The detection area becomes smaller.
- The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

- To reduce key battery depletion when the electronic key is to not be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the battery-saving mode. (→P. 166)

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs
- Personal computers
- Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
- Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
- Table lamps
- Induction cookers

■Replacing the battery

→P. 470

■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

NOTICE

■To prevent key damage

• Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
• Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
• Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
• Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.
• Do not disassemble the keys.
• Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
• Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

- Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that were provided with your vehicle.

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

Smart key system

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

① Grip the driver's door handle to unlock the door. Holding the driver's door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the doors. Grip the front passenger's door handle to unlock all the doors.*

① ② CTH32BT001

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be changed. (→P. 158)

② Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

◆Wireless remote control

① Locks all the doors Check that the door is securely locked. ② Unlocks all the doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors. Press and hold to open the windows ^1 and the moon roof. ^1,2 (→P. 183, 187)

① ② HOLD HOLD CTH32BT003

*1: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.
*2: If equipped

Operation signals

Doors:

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Windows and moon roof:

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are opening.

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

- When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle

When the door cannot be locked even if the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock sensor with the palm.

When gloves are being worn, remove the gloves.

Line drawing of a human hand with wrist and wristband, no text or symbols present

■Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors using the smart key system is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

Alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system. ( P. 90)

If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. ( P. 527)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. ( P. 470)

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

Door lock switches

① Locks all the doors
② Unlocks all the doors

① ② CTH32BT077

Inside lock buttons

① Locks the door
② Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered instructions for cleaning or assembly steps

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

① Unlock
② Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

① ② CTH32BT076

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or cancelled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 571.

Function Operation
Speed linked door locking function	All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Shift position linked door locking function	All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever out of P.
Shift position linked door unlocking function	All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.
Driver's door linked door unlocking function	All doors are automatically unlocked when driver's door is opened.

■Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

1 Turn the power switch off.
2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,

approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2)

Multi-information display		Unlocking function Beep
*1	*2	Holding the driver's door handle unlocks only the driver's door.	Exterior: Beeps 3 timesInterior: Pings once
		Holding the front passenger's door handle unlocks all the doors.
*1	*2	Holding either front door handle unlocks all the doors.	Exterior: Beeps twiceInterior: Pings once

*1: 4.2-inch display
*2: 7-inch display

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings

have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. ( P. 90)

■Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.

■Open door warning buzzer

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.

The open door(s) is displayed on the multi-information display.

Conditions affecting the operation of the smart key system or wireless remote control

→P. 167

■Rear seat reminder function

In order to remind you not to forget luggage, etc. in the rear seat, when the power switch is turned off after any of the following conditions are met, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display for approximately 6 seconds.

● The hybrid system is started within 10 minutes after opening and closing a rear door.
●A rear door has been opened and closed after the hybrid system was started.

However, if a rear door is opened and then closed within approximately 2 seconds, the rear seat reminder function may not operate.

The rear seat reminder function determines that luggage, etc. has been placed in a rear seat based on opening and closing of a rear door. Therefore, depending on the situation, the rear seat reminder function may not operate and you may still forget luggage, etc. in the rear seat, or it may operate unnecessarily.

The rear seat reminder function can be enabled/disabled. ( P. 109, 126)

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 569)

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
- Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
- Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

■When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing.

When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener switch, entry function or wireless remote control.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Press and hold the trunk opener switch.

HOLD CTH32BT065

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

Smart key system

While carrying the electronic key, press the button on the trunk lid.

When all the doors are unlocked using one of the following methods, the trunk can be opened without the electronic key:

• Entry function
• Wireless remote control
• Door lock switches
  • Automatic door unlocking system
• Mechanical key

CTH32BT011

◆Wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.

A buzzer sounds.

CTH32BT013

Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside

• When all doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid.
• If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
• If the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key may not be detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.
  ● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

■Open trunk warning buzzer

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk is not yet fully closed.

■Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling up the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

CTH32BT014

■ Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (→P. 528)

If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk. ( P. 528)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P. 470)

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 569)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Before driving

● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident.
- Do not allow children to play in the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.
- Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

WARNING

Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

• Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
• When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
• If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.
• Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.
• On an incline it is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

- When opening the trunk lid, take care so that it does not hit anyone in the face or any other part of the body.

CTH32BT015

- When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

- When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface.

CTH32BT016

- Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

Smart key system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

• Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 154)
• Opens the trunk (→P. 160)
  ● Starts the hybrid system ( P. 206)

Antenna location

① Antennas outside the cabin
② Antennas inside the cabin
③ Antenna inside the trunk
④ Antenna outside the trunk

① ② ① ② ③ ④ ① ② ② ③ ④ CTH32BT017

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of either of the front outside door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

Top-down schematic of a car with two shaded regions and labeled part (CTH32BT018), no readable text or symbols beyond label.

When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

When opening the trunk

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.

■Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display. (→P. 507)

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.

Alarm Situation	Correction procedure
Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds	An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.	Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
	The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked.	Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.
Interior alarm pings repeatedly	The power switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door was open (The driver's door was opened when the power switch was in ACCESSORY mode).	Turn the power switch off and close the driver's door.
	The power switch was turned off while the driver's door was open.	Close the driver's door.

■Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

- In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.

- The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

- The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

- If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver's door. In this case, take hold of the driver's door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and

holding . Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

CTH32BT019

■Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system use weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: →P. 527)

• When the electronic key battery is depleted
  ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

• When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
  • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
  • Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
  • Media such as CDs and DVDs

- When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

- When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices
• Another vehicle's electronic key, another electronic key of your vehicle, or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
  • Digital audio players
• Portable game systems

- If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

- When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

- When the vehicle is parked in a pay parking spot where radio waves are emitted.

■Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

- The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

- The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened.

- The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch modes are changed.

- Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

- As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

●The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

- If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

- When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.*

- If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

- Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

- Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P. 166)

- If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
- If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

*: This setting can be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
● The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (→P. 569)
- Setting the electronic key to battery-saving mode helps to reduce key battery depletion. (→P. 166)

■To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

If the smart key system does not operate properly

• Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 527)
  ● Starting the hybrid system: →P. 528

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 569)

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

• Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 154, 160, 527)
  ● Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: →P. 528
  ● Stopping the hybrid system: →P. 207

WARNING

■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas. (→P. 164) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

- Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

▶ Manual seat

① Seat position adjustment lever
② Seatback angle adjustment lever
③ Vertical height adjustment lever

① ③ ② CTH33BT001

Power seat

① Seat position adjustment switch
② Seatback angle adjustment switch
③ Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
④ Vertical height adjustment switch
⑤ Lumbar support adjustment switch (driver's side only)

CTH33BT002

WARNING

■When adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
- Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

■Seat adjustment

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

NOTICE

■When adjusting a front seat

When adjusting a front seat, make sure that the head restraint does not contact the headliner. Otherwise, the head restraint and headliner may be damaged.

Rear seats

The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.

Folding down the rear seatbacks

Pull the seatback lever in the trunk for the seatback you wish to fold down and then fold the seatback down.

CTH33BT018

WARNING

■When folding the seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
- Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
- Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driving.
- Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

■When returning the seat to its original position

● Ensure that the seat belt does not get caught between or behind the seats.
- If the seat belt has been released from its guide, pass the seat belt through its guide. (→P. 30)

■Seat adjustment

Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box and the rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.

■After returning the seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing it forward and rearward on the top.
- Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
● Make sure that the seat belt is passed through its guide.

NOTICE

■When the right seatback is folded down

Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged trunk will not damage the webbing of the rear center seat belt.

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Adjustable type

① Up

Pull the head restraint up.

② Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

① Lock release button ② CTH33BT004

▶ Integrated type

Head restraints cannot be adjusted or removed.

■Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Front seats: If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making the removal difficult, change the seat height or angle. (→P. 171)

Lock release button CTH33BT006

■Installing the head restraints

Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Lock release button CTH33BT007

▶ Rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button CTH33BT008

■Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

Side profile illustration of a human head and neck with a dashed line indicating a measurement or alignment point (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

■Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
- Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

- Do not drive with the head restraints removed. (However, if a head restraint interferes with installation of a child restraint system, the head restraint can be removed to accommodate the child restraint system: P. 54)

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

CTH34BT037

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

SRS AIRBAG CTH34BT003

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

CTH34BT004

Anti-glare function

▶ Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

① Normal position
② Anti-glare position

① ② CTH34BT005

▶ Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

On/Off

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Indicator CTH34BT006

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with an auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

CTH34BT007

WARNING

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment procedure

1 To select a mirror to adjust, turn the switch.

① Left
② Right

① ② CTH34BT008

2 To adjust the mirror, operate the switch.

① Up
② Right
③ Down
④ Left

① ② ③ ④ CTH34BT009

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

Diagram of a car's seat assembly with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

■Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. ( P. 370)

WARNING

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
  ●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
  ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

① Closing
② One-touch closing*
③ Opening
④ One-touch opening*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

① ② ③ ④ CTH35BT054

Preventing accidental operation (window lock switch)

This function can be used to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

Press the switch.

The indicator will come on and the passenger windows will be locked.

The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the driver's switch even if the lock switch is on.

Indicator CTH35BT055

■The power windows can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

- Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■ Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped.

■When the window cannot be opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door.

• Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so that the door window can be opened and closed.
• If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.

1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the door window.
3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more.
5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Door lock linked window operation

• The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ^* (→P. 527)
  ● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P. 154)

*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

Alarm

The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and a power window is closed using the door lock linked power window operation function. ( P. 91)

■Power windows open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the power windows open.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P. 569)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Closing the windows

The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P. 183)

- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

CTH35BT003

- When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.

- When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.

■ Catch protection function

● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.

●The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the window.

Moon roof\*

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

Opening and closing

① Opens the moon roof*

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

② Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Data ① ② CTH35BT004

Tilting up and down

① Tilts the moon roof up*
② Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

CTH35BT005

■The moon roof can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■Door lock linked moon roof operation

● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ^* ( P. 527)
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. * (→P. 154)

*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

- If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the "CLOSE" switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds. ^*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

- If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the "UP" switch *1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops.
3 Release the "UP" switch once and then press and hold the "UP" switch again. ^*1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position. ^*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the "CLOSE" or "UP" switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Alarm

The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and the moon roof is closed using the door lock linked moon roof operation function. ( P. 91)

■Moon roof open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 569)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Opening the moon roof

• Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
• Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Closing the moon roof

The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.

- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

- When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.

CTH35BT006

- When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught.

Driving

4

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle...... 192

Cargo and luggage .... 200

Vehicle load limits 203

Trailer towing.... 204

Dinghy towing 205

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch ..... 206

EV drive mode 213

Hybrid transmission...... 216

Turn signal lever.... 222

Parking brake.... 223

Brake Hold 227

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch.... 230

AHB (Automatic High Beam) 234

Windshield wipers and washer 238

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap 242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+...... 246

PCS (Pre-Collision System).... 252

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) 267

RSA (Road Sign Assist).... 282

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.... 287

Driving assist systems ..... 303

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).... 310

• BSM function ..... 313

Intuitive parking assist..... 317

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) 326

• RCTA function ..... 328

RCD (Rear Camera Detection) 335

PKSB (Parking Support Brake) 340

Parking Support Brake function (static objects).... 348

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles).... 352

Driving mode select switches .... 355

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips 357

Winter driving tips ...... 360

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the hybrid system

→P.206

Driving

1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. ( P. 216)
2 Release the parking brake. ( P. 223)
3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. ( P. 216)

Parking the vehicle

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 Set the parking brake ( P. 223), and shift the shift lever to P ( P. 216).
3 Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system.
4 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person. If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Starting off on a steep uphill

1 Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3 Release the parking brake.

Sudden start restraint control (Drive-Start Control [DSC])

When the following unusual operation is performed with the accelerator pedal depressed, the hybrid system output may be restrained.

• When the shift lever is shifted to R^* .
• When the shift lever is shifted from P or R to forward drive shift position such as D^* .

When the system operates, a message appears on the multi-information display and head-up display (if equipped). Read the message and follow the instruction.

*: Depending on the situation, the shift position may not be changed.

■When starting off on an uphill

The hill-start assist control will activate. ( P. 304)

For fuel-efficient driving

Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary to refrain from activities such as sudden acceleration. ( P. 357)

Coasting (Auto Glide Control)

When Eco drive mode is selected, under certain conditions, Auto Glide Control will operate automatically and allow the vehicle coast, enhancing fuel economy. ( P. 356)

- Driving in the rain

• Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
• Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
  ●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■Restraining hybrid system output (Brake Override System)

• When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the hybrid system output may be restrained.
  ● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and head-up display (if equipped) while the system is operating.

■ ECO Accelerator Guidance ( P. 123)

Eco-friendly driving may be achieved more easily by staying within the zone of Eco acceleration. Also, by staying within the zone of Eco acceleration, it will be easier to obtain a good Eco score.

- When starting off:

Gradually depress the accelerator pedal to stay within the zone of Eco acceleration and accelerate to the desired speed. By refraining from excessive acceleration, a good eco start score will be obtained.

- When driving:

After accelerating to the desired speed, release the accelerator pedal and drive at a stable speed while staying within the zone of Eco acceleration. By staying within the zone of Eco acceleration, a good eco cruise score will be obtained.

- When stopping:

By starting to release the accelerator pedal early before decelerating, a good eco stop score will be obtained.

Drive-Start Control (DSC)

When the TRAC is turned off ( P. 305), sudden start restraint control also does not operate. If your vehicle have trouble escaping from the mud or fresh snow due to sudden start restraint control operation, deactivate TRAC ( P. 305) so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh snow.

■Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

●For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

●For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( P. 546)

Eco-friendly driving

→P. 123, 138

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■When driving the vehicle

• Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
  • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle's movement.

- Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 491

- Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( P. 217)

- Do not adjust the display, the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When driving the vehicle

- Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■When shifting the shift lever

- Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

- Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

- Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

- Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●Shifting the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

- Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to any position other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■When the vehicle is stopped

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the shift lever is in any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
- If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

■When the vehicle is parked

• Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.
  Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
- The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

- Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.

- Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

- Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When the vehicle is parked

• Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
  ●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle.
  Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the "READY" indicator is illuminated.
  If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
• Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the "READY" indicator is illuminated or immediately after turning the hybrid system off. Doing so may cause burns.

■When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

When braking

• When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
  Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
• If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
  In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
  The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

NOTICE

■When driving the vehicle

• Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the hybrid system output.
• Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

• Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.
  Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
• When driving over bumps on the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( P. 513)

■When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

●Brake function
- Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transmission, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(→P. 203)

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

① Cargo capacity
② Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) ( P. 544)

graph TD
    A["Human Figure"] --> B["Group of People"]
    C["Two Dots"] --> D["Step ①"]
    E["Two Dots"] --> F["Step ②"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B^2 lb. (kg) - A^1 lb. (kg) = C^*3 lb. (kg)

*1: A = Weight of people
*2: B = Total load capacity
*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)

*4: D = Additional weight of people
*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

WARNING

■Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

●Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver's vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.
- Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
- On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
- On the package tray
- On the instrument panel
- On the dashboard
- Tray that has no lid

- Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

- When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.

■ Capacity and distribution

• Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
  ● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 544

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

♦ Seating capacity: →P. 544

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆Towing capacity

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. ( P. 458)

WARNING

■Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

CTH41BT001

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

CTH41BT002

NOTICE

■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

CTH41BT005

Power (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes.

Starting the hybrid system

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Check that the shift lever is in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.

4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

If the "READY" indicator turns on, the hybrid system will operate nor-mally.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

The hybrid system can be started from any power switch mode.

READY POWER CTH42BT112

5 Check that the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

The vehicle will not move when the "READY" indicator is off.

Stopping the hybrid system

1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 Set the parking brake ( P. 223), and shift the shift lever to P.
3 Press the power switch.

Driving-related data will be displayed on the multi-information display.

■Automatic hybrid system shut off feature

• The vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically shuts off the hybrid system when the shift lever is in P with the hybrid system operating for an extended period.
  ● The hybrid system will automatically shut off after approximately 1 hour if it has been left running while the shift lever is in P.
  ● The timer for the automatic hybrid system shut off feature will reset if the brake pedal is depressed or if the shift lever is in a position other than P.
• After the vehicle is parked, if the door is locked with the door lock switch (→P. 156) from the inside or the mechanical key (→P. 527) from the outside, the automatic hybrid system shut off feature will be disabled. The timer for the automatic hybrid system shut off feature will be re-enabled if the driver's door is opened.

Changing power switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

① Off*

The emergency flashers can be used.

② ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

A message indicating how to start the hybrid system will be displayed on the multi-information display.

③ ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

A message indicating how to start the hybrid system will be displayed on the multi-information display.

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["② ACCESSORY"]
    B --> C["③ IGNITION ON"]
    D["POWER"] --> E["Arrow pointing to the second step"]

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the power switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P

If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, a message indicating to shift the shift lever to P will be displayed on the multi-information display. At this time, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Check that "Turn Power Off" is displayed on the multi-information display and then press the power switch once.
4 Check that "Turn Power Off" on the multi-information display is turned off.

■Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (with the hybrid system not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

→P. 81

Electronic key battery depletion

→P. 152

■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

• When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the "READY" indicator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the "READY" indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move.
• AXVH70 model vehicles*: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22°F [-30°C]) under the influence of the outside temperature, it may not be possible to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery increases due to the outside temperature increase etc.

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 545)

■Conditions affecting operation

→P. 167

■Notes for the entry function

→P. 168

If the hybrid system does not start

● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 89) Contact your Toyota dealer.
- Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P.
- If a message related to start-up is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

Steering lock

After turning the power switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

■When the steering lock cannot be released

A message informing the driver that the steering wheel is locked will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the power switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

POWER CTH42BT024

■Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

■ When a message requesting the smart key system be inspected is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

When “Check Fuel Cap” is displayed on the multi-information display →P. 245

If the "READY" indicator does not come on

In the event that the "READY" indicator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures for starting the vehicle, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

→P. 83

■If the electronic key battery is depleted

→P. 470

Operation of the power switch

• If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the power switch mode may not change or the hybrid system may not start.
• If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch off, wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

→P. 527

WARNING

■When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Caution while driving

If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

- If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P. 491) However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

- If the power switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.

- When restarting the hybrid system after an emergency shutdown while driving, press the power switch. When restarting the hybrid system after stopping the vehicle, change the shift position to P and then press the power switch.

When parking

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

• If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.
• Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system operating for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

• Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.
• If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch off.
• Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.

■When starting the hybrid system

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
• If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch

If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

EV drive mode

In EV drive mode, electric power is supplied by the hybrid battery (traction battery), and only the electric motor (traction motor) is used to drive the vehicle.

This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and gas emissions.

However, when the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System is active, the vehicle may produce sound.

Turns EV drive mode on/off

When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).

EV MODE EV MODE CTH42BT025

■Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

●The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32^ F ( 0^ C) for a long period of time etc.
●The gasoline engine is warming up.
●The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the energy monitor display is low. ( P. 142)

● Vehicle speed is high.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
●The windshield defogger is in use.

■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode.

After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.

■Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.

●The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the energy monitor on the multi-information display is low. ( P. 142)
● Vehicle speed is high.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

■Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive mode's possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approximately 0.9 miles (1 km). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used.

(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)

Fuel economy

The hybrid system is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

If "EV Mode Unavailable" is shown on the multi-information display

The EV drive mode is not available. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, vehicle speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range or accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed. Use the EV drive mode when it becomes available.

If "EV Mode Deactivated" is shown on the multi-information display

The EV drive mode has been automatically canceled. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the battery charge is low, vehicle speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range or accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed. Drive the vehicle for a while before attempting to turn on the EV drive mode again.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them. Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System is active.

Hybrid transmission

Shifting the shift lever

P R N + S -D - CTH42BT050

While the power switch is in ON mode and the brake pedal depressed*, shift the shift lever while pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.
Shift the shift lever while pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.
Shift the shift lever normally.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and the brake pedal is depressed.

*: For the vehicle be able to be shifted from P, the brake pedal must be depressed before the shift release button is pushed. If the shift release button is pushed first, the shift lock will not be released.

Shift position purpose

Shift position Objective or function
P Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving*	1
S S mode driving*	^2 (→P. 218)

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal driving.

*2: By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating force and engine braking force.

Selecting the driving mode

→P. 355

Changing shift ranges in S mode

When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever or paddle shift switches (if equipped) can be operated as follows:

▶ Shift lever ▶ Paddle shift switches (if equipped)

S 4 *1 S 4 *2 ① ② CTH42BT104

S 4 *1 S 4 *2 ② ① CTH42BT105

① Upshifting
② Downshifting

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to S5 or S4 according to vehicle speed.

*1: Vehicles with 4.2-inch display
*2: Vehicles with 7-inch display

Shift ranges and their functions

●You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine braking force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
- If you accelerate while in ranges 1 to 4, the shift range may automatically increase in accordance with the vehicle speed.

Selecting shift ranges in the D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)

To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.

① Upshifting
② Downshifting

The selected shift range, from D1 to D6 will be displayed on the multi-information display.

*1: Vehicles with 4.2-inch display
*2: Vehicles with 7-inch display

D 4 *1 D 4 *2 ② ① CTH42BT106

- When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated with the shift lever in the D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)

The shift range is downshifted to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions.

■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:

●The “+” paddle shift switch is held down for a period of time
●When the vehicle comes to a stop
- If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
- When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than D

S mode

• When the shift range is S4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to S6.
  ● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.

■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode or paddle shifting)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

■When driving with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not occur because dynamic radar cruise control with full speed range will not be canceled.

●While driving in D or S mode, downshifting to 5 or 4. (→P. 287)
- When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in the D position. (→P. 355)

■Restraining sudden start (Drive-start Control)

→P. 194

Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the power switch is in the ON mode, the brake pedal is depressed and the shift release button is pushed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted even though the brake pedal is depressed and the shift release button is pushed, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

1 Set the parking brake.
2 Turn the power switch off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screw-driver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a screwdriver inserted into a gear shift lever (no text or symbols present)

5 Press and hold the shift lock override button and then push the button on the shift knob.

The shift lever can be shifted while both buttons are pressed.

CTH42BT157

If the S indicator does not come on or the D indicator is displayed even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever is in D.)

WARNING

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.

■To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge precaution

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a certain amount of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

① Right turn
② Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

③ Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

④ Left turn

Diagram illustrating hand massage technique with directional arrows and vehicle control interface

① ② ③ ④ CTH42BT107

■Turn signals can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.

Parking brake

A mode can be selected from the following modes.

Automatic mode

The parking brake is set or released automatically according to the shift lever operation.

Even when in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set and released manually. ( P. 224)

① Turns automatic mode on (while the vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the parking brake switch until shown on the multi-information display)

- When the shift lever is moved out of P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light turn off. - When the shift lever is moved into P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light turn on.

Operate the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

② Turns automatic mode off (while the vehicle is stopped, press and hold the parking brake switch until a message is shown on the multi-information display)

① EPB Shift Interlock Function Activated ② EPB Shift Interlock Function Deactivated PARK *1 *2 Parking brake light CTH42BT095US

Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.

*1: For U.S.A.
*2: For Canada

Manual mode

The parking brake can be set and released manually.

① Sets the parking brake

The parking brake indicator light and parking brake light will turn on.

Pull and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.

② Releases the parking brake

Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. Make sure that the parking brake indicator light or parking brake light turn off.

If the parking brake indicator light or parking brake light flashes, operate the switch again.

(→P. 498)

*1: For U.S.A.

*2: For Canada

PARK *1 (P) *2 Parking brake light CTH42BT108

Parking the vehicle

→P. 192

■Parking brake operation

• When the power switch is not in ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch.
• When the power switch is not in ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.

■Automatic release function

The parking brake is automatically released when slowly depress the accelerator pedal.

The parking brake will be released automatically under the following conditions:

The driver's door is closed.
The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
- Shift the shift lever is in a forward or reverse position.
● The malfunction indicator lamp or brake system warning light is not illuminated.

If the automatic release function does not operate, manually release the parking brake.

If “Parking Brake Temporarily Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display

If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.

If "Parking Brake Unavailable" is displayed on the multi-information display

Operate the parking brake switch. If the message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Parking brake indicator light and parking brake light

●Depending on the power switch mode, the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light will turn on and stay on as described below:
ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.

- When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged.

"Release Parking Brake" is displayed on the multi-information display.

■Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

If the brake system warning light comes on

→P. 497

■Usage in winter time

→P. 360

WARNING

■When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Parking brake switch

Do not set any objects near the parking brake switch. Objects may interfere with the switch and may lead the parking brake to unexpectedly operate.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake and make sure that the vehicle does not move.

■When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.

■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in D, S or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S to allow smooth start off.

Turns the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indicator (green) comes on. While the system is holding the brakes, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) will illuminate.

*1: Brake hold standby indicator
*2: Brake hold operated indicator

HOLD *1 HOLD *2 CTH42BT093

■Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:

The driver's door is not closed.
The driver's seat belt is not buckled.

If either of the above is detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brakes, a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.

Brake hold function

• If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brakes, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.
  ● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brakes, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the switch again.
  ● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes

Perform any of the following operations to release the parking brake.

• Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.)
• Operate the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. ( P. 223)

■When an inspection at your Toyota dealer is necessary

When the brake hold standby indicator (green) does not illuminate even when the brake hold switch is pressed with the brake hold system operating conditions met, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

■Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■If the brake hold operated indicator flashes

→P. 498

WARNING

■When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a steep incline, exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.

■When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the power switch off while the system is holding the brakes may release the brakes, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the power switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows:

For U.S.A.

① AUTO The headlights, day-time running lights (→P.232) and all the listed below turn on and off automatically. (When the power switch is in ON mode)

② ≧00 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (→P. 232) turn on.

ights ③ ② ① ④ CTH42BT109

③ The headlights and all the lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
④ DRL OFF The daytime running lights turn off.

For Canada

① AUTO The headlights, day-time running lights (→P.232) and all the listed below turn on and off automatically. (When the power switch is in ON mode)

② ≧00 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (→P. 232) turn on.

③ The headlights and all the lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.

ights ③ ② ① CTH42BT110

Turning on the high beam headlights

① With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

② Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

① ② ≡D CTH42BT111

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire's angle as controlled by steering input.

AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

■Daytime running light system

- Type A:

The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the headlights and illuminate darker than the headlights.

Type B:

The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights.

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)

• The hybrid system is operating
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the _0 < AUTO * position

*: When the surroundings are bright

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again.

• For U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
• Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

■Automatic light off system

• When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immediately if the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)
• When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver's door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light

switch off once and then back to

If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

Light reminder buzzer (except when the light switch is in) AUTO

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCES-SORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination

When driving during daytime with the headlight switch turned to AUTO, windshield wipers are used, the headlights will turn on automatically after several seconds to help enhance the visibility of your vehicle.

■Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

■12-volt battery-saving function

In the following conditions, the remaining lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged:

●The headlights and/or tail lights are on.
●The power switch is in ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:
- When the power switch is turned to ON mode.
●When the light switch is operated.
- When a door or the trunk is opened or closed.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 569)

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

The Automatic High Beam uses a front camera located behind the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc., and automatically turns the high beams on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if necessary.

■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High Beam

1 Turn the headlight switch to the (→P. 230)

position AUTO

2 Press the Automatic High Beam switch.

When the headlight switch lever is in the low beam position, the AHB system will be enabled and the AHB indicator will illuminate.

A A CTH43BT016

Turning the high beams on/off manually

■Switching to the high beams

Push the lever away from you.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

Pull the lever to its original position to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

CTH43BT001

■ Switching to the low beams

Press the Automatic High Beam switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

A CTH43BT088

■ Temporarily switching to the low beams

Pull the lever toward you and then return it to its original position.

The high beams are on while the lever is pulled toward you. However, after the lever is returned to its original position, the low beams remain on for a certain amount of time. Afterwards, the Automatic High Beam will be activated again.

CTH43BT085

■Temporarily switching to the low beams

It is recommended to switch to the low beams when the high beam may cause problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

Conditions to turn the high beams on/off automatically

• When all of the following conditions are met, the high beams will be turned on automatically (after approximately 1 second):
• The vehicle speed is approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
• If any of the following conditions is met, the high beams will turn off automatically:
• The vehicle speed is below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

■Front camera detection information

● The high beams may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
- When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve
- When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
- When vehicles ahead cannot be detected due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees
- When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road
- When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on

● The high beams may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned on is detected.

●House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs and other reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high beams to turn on or off:

• The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle

●The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.

●Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.

- In the following situations the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high and low beams.

- When driving in inclement weather (heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

- When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.

- When the windshield is cracked or damaged

- When the front camera is deformed or dirty

- When the temperature of the front camera is extremely high

- When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail lights or fog lights

- When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly

- When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

- When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness

- When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.)

- When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road

- When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror

- When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck

- When the vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly

- When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

- When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low beams repeatedly in an abnormal manner

- When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestrians or other drivers

■Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

1 Turn the power switch off while the following conditions are met.

• The headlight switch is in the or positionto
• The headlight switch lever is in the original position.

2 Turn the power switch to ON mode.

3 Within 60 seconds after 2 repeat pushing the headlight switch lever to the high beam position then pulling it to the original position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever in the original position.

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the wiper lever

Operating the lever operates the wipers or washer as follows.

When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper interval can be also adjusted.

① INT *1 or *2

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

The intermittent wind-shield wiper operates more frequently as vehicle speed becomes higher.

② LO *1 or *▼ 2

Low speed windshield wiper operation

③ HI *1 or *2

High speed windshield wiper operation

④ MIST *1 or *△ 2

Temporary operation

Diagram showing car steering wheel and hand positioning with directional arrows indicating movement or change

HCT OUT INT LO HT INT ④ ① ② ③ CTH43BT086

*1: For U.S.A.
*2: For Canada

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

⑤ Increases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency
⑥ Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

⑤ ⑥ CTH43BT007

Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

(After operating several times, the wipers operate once more time after a short delay to prevent dripping. However, the dripping prevention does not operate while the vehicle is moving.)

⑦ CTH43BT008

■The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

■When stopping the hybrid system in an emergency while driving

If the windshield wipers are operating when the hybrid system is stopped, the windshield wipers will operate in high speed operation. After the vehicle is stopped, operation will return to normal when the power switch is turned to ON mode, or operation will stop when the driver's door is opened.

WARNING

■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Changing the windshield wiper rest position/Lifting the wind-shield wipers

When the windshield wipers are not being used, they retract to below the hood. To enable the windshield wipers to be lifted when parking in cold conditions or when replacing a windshield wiper insert, change the rest position of the windshield wipers to the service position using the wiper lever.

■Raising the wipers to the service position

Within approximately 45 seconds of turning the power switch off, move the wiper lever to the MIST *1 or △* 2 position and hold it for approximately 2 seconds or more.

The wipers will move to the service position.

*1: For U.S.A.
*2: For Canada

CTH43BT087

■ Lifting the windshield wipers

While holding the hook portion of the wiper arm, lift the shield wiper from the wind-shield.

wind Hook portion CTH43BT020

■Lowering the windshield wipers to the retracted position

With the windshield wipers placed on the windshield, turn the power switch to ON mode and then move the wiper lever to an operating position. When the wiper switch is turned off, the windshield wipers will stop at the retracted position.

NOTICE

■When lifting the windshield wipers

• Do not lift the windshield wipers when they are in the retracted position below the hood. Otherwise, they may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to a windshield wiper and/or the hood.
• Do not operate the wiper lever when the windshield wipers are lifted. Otherwise, the windshield wipers may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to the windshield wipers and/or hood.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The fuel tank of your vehicle has a special structure, which requires a reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. After the opener switch has been pressed, it will take several seconds until the vehicle is ready for refueling.

Before refueling the vehicle

• Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off.
• Confirm the type of fuel.

Fuel types

→P. 553

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

WARNING

■When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

- Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

- Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

- Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

- Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

WARNING

When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
- Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
- Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

Refueling

● Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If more than 30 minutes passes, the internal valve closes. In this condition, fuel may overflow during the refueling process.
Press the fuel filler door opener switch again.

- Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

- When refueling your vehicle, make sure that the fuel filler door lock is not pushed by the fuel nozzle boot, etc., as this may cause a valve to close, possibly resulting in a fuel spill.

If the fuel filler door lock has been pushed, operate the fuel filler door opener switch in the vehicle before continuing to refuel.

CTH44BT016

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 Press and hold the opener switch to open the fuel filler door.

The fuel filler door will open within about 10 seconds of the switch being pressed.

Before refueling is possible, a message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster to indicate the progress of the fuel filler door opener.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to remove it and hang it on the back of the fuel filler door.

HOLD CTH32BT064

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with highlighted components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

■If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever.

CTH44BT004

When "Check Fuel Cap" is displayed on the multi-information display

The fuel tank cap may be unfastened or loose. Turn the power switch off, check the cap and tighten it securely. If the message remains, wait a few seconds and then turn the power switch off once again.

WARNING

■When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When opening the fuel filler door manually

• Do not open the fuel filler door manually except in an emergency. Fuel may overflow.
• Using the lever to open the fuel filler door may not allow for an adequate reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. To prevent fuel from spilling out, turn the cap slowly when removing it.
  During refueling, fuel may spill out from the filler opening due to air being discharged from inside the fuel tank. Therefore, fill the fuel tank carefully and slowly.

Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+

The Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+ consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

Driving assist system

◆PCS (Pre-Collision System)

→P.252

◆LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

→P.267

◆AHB (Automatic High Beam)

→P.234

◆RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)

→P.282

◆ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

→P.287

WARNING

Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+

The Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+ is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

Sensors

Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

① Radar sensor
② Front camera

① ② CTH45BT227

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

- Keep the radar sensor and the radar sensor cover clean at all times.

① Radar sensor
② Radar sensor cover

If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging them.

① ② CTH45BT228

• Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the radar sensor, radar sensor cover or surrounding area.
• Do not subject the radar sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact. If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
• Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
• Do not modify or paint the radar sensor or radar sensor cover.

• In the following cases, the radar sensor must be recalibrated. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

• When the radar sensor or front grille are removed and installed, or replaced

• When the front bumper is replaced

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the front camera

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the front camera may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

- Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clean the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the front camera is installed is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.

- Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, etc., to the outer side of the windshield in front of the front camera (shaded area in the illustration).

A: From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the front camera

A B CTH45BT094

B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the front camera)

• If the part of the windshield in front of the front camera is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. (→P. 370)
• If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.
• Do not attach window tint to the windshield.
• Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.

After replacing the windshield, the front camera must be recalibrated. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

• Do not allow liquids to contact the front camera.
  ●Do not allow bright lights to shine into the front camera.
• Do not dirty or damage the front camera.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens of the front camera. Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

• Do not subject the front camera to a strong impact.
• Do not change the installation position or direction of the front camera or remove it.
• Do not disassemble the front camera.
• Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the front camera (inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
• Do not attach any accessories to the hood, front grille or front bumper that may obstruct the front camera. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
• If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the front camera.
  ●Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

- In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.

Situation Actions
When the area around a camera is covered with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign matter	Using the wiper and A/C function, remove the dirt and other attached matter. (→P. 370)
When the temperature around the front camera is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment	If the front camera is hot, such as after the vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the air conditioning system to decrease the temperature around the front camera.If a sunshade was used when the vehicle was parked, depending on its type, the sunlight reflected from the surface of the sunshade may cause the temperature of the front camera to become excessively high.
	If the front camera is cold, such after the vehicle is parked in an extremely cold environment, use the air conditioning system to increase the temperature around the front camera.
The area in front of the front camera is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the part of the windshield in front of the front camera.	Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to clear the obstruction.
When “Pre-Collision System Radar In Self Calibration Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is displayed	Check whether there is attached materials on the radar sensor and radar sensor cover, and if there is, remove it.

- In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.

• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment
• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera
• Depending on the conditions in the vicinity of the vehicle, the radar may judge the surrounding environment cannot be properly recognized. In that case, “Pre-Collision System Unavailable See Owner's Manual” is displayed.

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and front camera to detect objects ( P. 252) in front of the vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( P. 257)

Detectable objects

The system can detect the following (The detectable objects differs depending on the function.):

●Vehicles
●Bicyclists
●Pedestrians

System functions

■Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

BRAKE! CTH45BT218US

■Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

■Pre-collision braking

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the impact of the collision.

Emergency steering assist

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high and that there is sufficient space for the vehicle to be steered into within its lane, and the driver has begun evasive maneuver or steering, emergency steering assist will assist the steering movements to help enhance the vehicle stability and for lane departure prevention.

During operation, the indicator will illuminate in green.

CTH45BT259

■Intersection right/left turn assistance

If the system determines that there is a high possibility of a collision in the following situations, it will assist with Pre-collision warning and, if necessary Pre-collision braking.

Depending on the configuration of the intersection, it may not be possible to support.

- When you turn right/left at an intersection and cross the path of an oncoming vehicle

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows and lane markings, no text or symbols present.

- When you turn right/left, pedestrian is detected in the forward direction and estimated to enter your vehicle's path (bicyclists are not detected.)

Top-down diagram of a car with a person walking on a road, showing a spotlight and lane markings (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■Limitations of the pre-collision system

●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

- Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: P. 261

- Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: P. 263

- Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself. Depending on the objects used for testing (dummies, cardboard objects imitating detectable objects, etc.), the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

WARNING

■Pre-collision braking

• When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.
• If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
  The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
  In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.
• If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

Emergency steering assist

As emergency steering assist operation will be canceled when the system determines that lane departure prevention function has been completed.
Emergency steering assist may not operate or may be cancel in the following cases as the system may determine the driver is taking actions.

- If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly, the steering wheel is being operated sharply, the brake pedal is being depressed or the turn signal lever is being operated. In this case, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and the emergency steering assist may not operate.

- In some situations, while the emergency steering assist is operating operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal depressed strongly, the steering wheel is operated sharply or the brake pedal is being depressed and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

- When the emergency steering assist is operating, if the steering wheel is held firmly or is operated in the opposite direction to that which the system is generating torque, the function may be canceled.

is

WARNING

■When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●When the vehicle is being towed
- When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
- When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
- When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the hybrid system on and the tires are allowed to rotate freely
- When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
- When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons
- If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
- When the tires are not properly inflated
- When the tires are very worn
●When tires of a size other than specified are installed
●When tire chains are installed
- When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
- If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or front camera is temporarily installed to the vehicle

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system

The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on 2-inch display) or (7-inch display) ( P. 109, 126) of the multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

OFF Pre-Collision System Off CTH45BT219US

■Changing the pre-collision warning timing

The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on (4.2-inch display) or (7-inch display) (→P. 109, 126) of the multi-information display.

The warning timing setting is retained when the power switch is turned off. However, if the pre-collision system is disabled and re-enabled, the operation timing will return to the default setting (middle).

If the pre-collision warning timing is changed, emergency steering assist timing will also be changed accordingly.

If late is selected, emergency steering assist would not operate in case of an emergency.

① Early
② Middle

This is the default setting.

③ Late

graph TD
    A["① Sensor"] --> B["② Sensor"]
    B --> C["③ Sensor"]
    D["Top Control Panel"] --> E["Top Control Panel"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

■Operational conditions for each pre-collision function

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

• If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
• If the shift lever is in R
• When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

The operation speeds and operation cancellation for each function is listed below.

●Pre-collision warning

Detectable objects	Vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 13 to 110 mph (20 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)

While the pre-collision warning function is operating, if the steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly, the pre-collision warning may be cancelled.

●Pre-collision brake assist

Detectable objects	Vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles	Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h)

●Pre-collision braking

Detectable objects	Vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 13 to 110 mph (20 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

●Emergency steering assist

When the turn signal lights are flashing, emergency steering assist will not operate in case of an emergency.

Detectable objects	Vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles, bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h)

If any of the following occur while the emergency steering assist function is operating, it will be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
  • The brake pedal is depressed.

● Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision warning)

When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersection which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.

Detectable objects	Vehicle speed	Oncoming vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 35 mph (30 to 55 km/h)	Approx. 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h)
Pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)	—	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)

● Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision braking)

When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersection which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.

Detectable objects	Vehicle speed	Oncoming vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 10 to 15 mph (15 to 25 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 28 mph (30 to 45 km/h)	Approx. 28 to 43 mph (45 to 70 km/h)
Pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)	—	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)

■Object detection function

The system detects objects based on their size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. (→P. 263)

The illustration shows an image of detectable objects.

CTY45AX187

Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a detectable object, etc.
• When changing lanes while overtaking a detectable object, etc.

- When approaching a detectable object in an adjacent lane or on the roadside, such as when changing the course of travel or driving on a winding road

CTY45AX159

• When rapidly closing on a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as detectable objects, guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls

- When there is a detectable object or other object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve

CTY45AX186

• When there are patterns or paint in front of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a detectable object
• When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

- When overtaking a detectable object that is changing lanes or making a right/left turn

Diagram showing two cars on a road with sensor waves, no text or symbols present

- When passing a detectable object in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with a shaded triangular light source, no text or symbols present

- When a detectable object approaches very close and then stops before entering the path of your vehicle

- If the front of your vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when on an uneven or undulating road surface

- When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

- When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion in front of your vehicle

- When passing under an object (road sign, billboard, etc.)

Diagram of a car driving on a road with sensor waves projecting onto a barrier (no text or symbols)

- When approaching an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

- When using an automatic car wash

- When driving through or under objects that may contact your vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

Illustration of a car driving on a road with trees and a vehicle in the background (no text or symbols)

- When driving through steam or smoke

- When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail

- When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, radar equipped vehicles, etc., or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present

- When there are many things which can reflect the radio waves of the radar in the vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel roads, snow covered road that have tracks, etc.)

- While making a right/left turn, when an oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedestrian has already exited the path of your vehicle

- While making a right/left turn, closely in front of an oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedestrian.

- While making a right/left turn, when an oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedestrian stops before entering the path of your vehicle

- While making a right/left turn, when an oncoming vehicle turns right/left in front of your vehicle

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows and a shaded area, no text or symbols present.

- While steering into the direction of oncoming traffic

■Situations in which the system may not operate properly

- In some situations such as the following, an object may not be detected by the radar sensor and front camera, preventing the system from operating properly:

- When a detectable object is approaching your vehicle

- When your vehicle or a detectable object is wobbling

- If a detectable object makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

- When your vehicle approaches a detectable object rapidly

- When a detectable object is not directly in front of your vehicle

Top-down diagram of two cars with a light beam projecting onto a road, showing sound waves and motion indicators (no text or symbols)

- When a detectable object is near a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole cover, vehicle, steel plate on the road, etc.

- When a detectable object is under a structure

- When part of a detectable object is hidden by an object, such as large baggage, an umbrella, or guardrail

- When there are many things which can reflect the radio waves of the radar in the vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel roads, snow covered road that have tracks, etc.)

- When there is an effect on the radio waves to the radar that is installed on another vehicle

- When multiple detectable objects are close together

- If the sun or other light is shining directly on a detectable object

- When a detectable object is a shade of white and looks extremely bright

- When a detectable object appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as its surroundings

- If a detectable object cuts or suddenly emerges in front of your vehicle

- When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

- When a very bright light ahead, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the front camera

- When approaching the side or front of a vehicle ahead

- If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle

• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a personal mobility vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

- If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

Diagram showing a car approaching a truck with motion lines, labeled CTY45AX165 (no text on diagram itself)

- If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

Diagram showing a car approaching a vehicle with sensor beams (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a bicycle ridden by more than one person, or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)
• If a pedestrian/ or the riding height of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• If a pedestrian is bending forward or squatting or bicyclist is bending forward
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast
• If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel, making a detectable object appear to be nearly the same color as its surroundings
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
  • After the hybrid system has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding

- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

Two cars on a road with visible sound waves, one emitting motion blur (no text or symbols)

• If the wheels are misaligned

- If a wiper blade is blocking the front camera

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds

- When driving on a hill

- If the radar sensor or front camera is misaligned

- When driving in a traffic lane separated by more than one lane where oncoming vehicles are driving while making a right/left turn

- When largely out of place with the opposite facing targeted oncoming vehicle during a right/left turn

Top-down diagram of a road intersection with two cars, one emitting a light beam (no text or symbols)

- While making a right/left turn, when a pedestrian approaches from behind or side of your vehicle

STS45BG040

- In addition to the above, in some situations, such as the following, the emergency steering assist may not operate.

- When the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see, such as when they are faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is cast upon them

- When the lane is wider or narrower than normal

- When there is a light and dark pattern on the road surface, such as due to road repairs

- When the target is too close

- When there is insufficient safe or unobstructed space for the vehicle to be steered into

• If oncoming vehicle is present

• If VSC function is operating

- In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force or steering force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
• When the road surface has deep wheel tracks
• When driving on a hill road
• When driving on a road that has inclines to the left or right

If VSC is disabled

• If VSC is disabled (→P. 304), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions are also disabled.
• The PCS warning light will turn on and "VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System Unavailable" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

Summary of functions

While driving on a road with clear white (yellow) lane lines, the LTA system warns the driver if the vehicle may deviate from the current lane or course *, and also can slightly operate the steering wheel to help avoid deviation from the lane or course*. Also, while the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating, this system will operate the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's lane position.

The LTA system recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or a course* using the front camera. Additionally, it detects preceding vehicles using the front camera and radar.

Diagram of a car interior showing a door and seat with a black arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols)

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

WARNING

■Before using LTA system

• Do not rely solely upon the LTA system. The LTA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.
  ● Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

WARNING

■Situations unsuitable for LTA system

In the following situations, use the LTA switch to turn the system off. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.
●Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
- When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.
●During emergency towing

■ Preventing LTA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake

• Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.
• Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
• If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the functions may not operate properly and the vehicle may depart from its lane. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle without relying solely on the functions.

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P. 277) and the preceding vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.)

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with a dashed path and label CTH45BT251 (no readable text or symbols)

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P. 277) and the preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane.)

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P. 277) and the preceding vehicle departs from its lane. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P. 277) and the preceding vehicle is being driven extremely close to the left/right lane line. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)

●Vehicle is being driven around a sharp curve.

- Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, reflective poles, etc.).

3D illustration of a car on an elevated road with five vertical posts (no text or symbols)

WARNING

●Vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

graph TD
    A["Top Left Road Intersection"] --> B["Top Right Road Intersection"]
    B --> C["Bottom Left Road Intersection"]
    C --> D["Bottom Right Road Intersection"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

●Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow) lines, etc. are present due to road repair.

Diagram showing a car with motion trajectory and label CTH45BT254 (no readable text or symbols)

There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.

● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.

● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are present.

● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

●The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).

●The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.

- If the edge of the road is not clear or straight.

● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.

●The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

WARNING

● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
●The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
●The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
●The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.
●The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
●The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
- When driving in a tunnel or at night with the headlights off or when a headlight is dim due to its lens being dirty or it being misaligned.
●The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle is affected by wind from a vehicle driven in a nearby lane.
●The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.
- When tires of a size other than specified are installed.
●Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
●The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

Functions included in LTA system

◆Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course *, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and a warning buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds, check the area around your vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.

Vehicle with BSM: When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the lane departure alert will operate even if the turn signals are operating.

IN45LA452

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

- Steering assist function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course*, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.

Vehicle with BSM: When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the steering assist function will operate even if the turn signals are operating.

Top-down diagram of a road with multiple cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

◆ Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying within a lane, the warning buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

IN45LA454

◆Lane centering function

This function is linked with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range and provides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane.

When dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is not operating, the lane centering function does not operate.

In situations where the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see or are not visible, such as when in a traffic jam, this function will operate to help follow a preceding vehicle by monitoring the position of the preceding vehicle.

CTH45BT255

Turning LTA system on

Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA system on.

The LTA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the LTA switch again to turn the LTA system off.

When the LTA system is turned on or off, operation of the LTA system continues in the same condition the next time the hybrid system is started.

LTA Steering Assist Active Lane Centering Active CTH45BT237US

Indications on multi-information display

The illustration used is intended as an example, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information display.

① LTA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.

Illuminated in white:

LTA system is operating.

Illuminated in green:

Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.

Flashing in yellow:

Lane departure alert function is operating.

① ② ③ ④ CTH45BT267

② Operation display of steering wheel operation support

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information display.

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are displayed: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the lane centering function is operating.

One outer side of the lane is displayed: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are flashing: Alerts the driver that their input is necessary to stay in the center of the lane (lane centering function).

③ Lane departure alert function display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information display.

▶ Inside of displayed lines is white

▶ Inside of displayed lines is black

Two white diagonal light streaks on a black background, labeled CTH45BT037 (no other text or symbols)

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines or a course*. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes yellow.

Two white elongated, elongated structures against a black background, resembling abstract or microscopic patterns (no text or symbols)

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or a course* or is temporarily canceled.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

④ Follow-up cruising display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information display.

Indicates that steering assist of the lane centering function is operating by monitoring the position of a preceding vehicle.

When the follow-up cruising display is displayed, if the preceding vehicle moves, your vehicle may move in the same way. Always pay careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel as necessary to correct the path of the vehicle and ensure safety.

■Operation conditions of each function

●Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.
  • Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. *1
• System recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or a course ^2 . (When a white [yellow] line or course 2 is recognized on only one side, the system will operate only for the recognized side.)

- Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

- Turn signal lever is not operated. (Vehicle with BSM: Except when another vehicle is in the lane on the side where the turn signal was operated)

- Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.

- No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 281)

^*1 : The function operates even if the vehicle speed is less than approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) when the lane centering function is operating.

*2: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

●Steering assist function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.

• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
  • ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

● Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• Setting for "Sway Warning" in 2.2-inch display) or (7inch display) of the multi-information display is set to "On". (→P. 104, 117)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 281)

●Lane centering function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.
• Setting for “Lane Center” in (4.2-inch display) or (7-inch display) of the multi-information display is set to “On”. (→P. 104, 117)

• This function recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or the position of a preceding vehicle (except when the preceding vehicle is small, such as a motorcycle).

• The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 281)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
  • ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning is not displayed. (→P. 280)
• The vehicle is being driven in the center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not operating.

■Temporary cancelation of functions

• When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (→P. 278)
• If the operation conditions (→P. 278) are no longer met while the lane centering function is operating, the buzzer may sound to indicate that the function has been temporarily canceled.

■Steering assist function/lane centering function

● Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
- The steering control of the function is overridden by the driver's steering wheel operation.
- Do not attempt to test the operation of the steering assist function.

■Lane departure alert function

● The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
- If the edge of the course * is not clear or straight, the lane departure alert function may not operate.
● Vehicle with BSM: It may not be possible for the system to determine if there is a danger of a collision with a vehicle in an adjacent lane.
- Do not attempt to test the operation of the lane departure alert function.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

■Hands off steering wheel warning

In the following situations, a warning message urging the driver to hold the steering wheel and the symbol shown in the illustration are displayed on the multi-information display to warn the driver. The warning stops when the system determines that the driver holds the steering wheel. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel when using this system, regardless of warnings.

Stylized car head icon with hands on steering wheel (no text or symbols)

CTH45BT187

- When the system determines the driver is not holding the steering wheel while the lane centering function is operating.

If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel, the buzzer sounds, the driver is warned and the function is temporarily canceled. This warning also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount.

- When the system determines that the vehicle may deviate from the lane while driving around a curve while the lane centering function is operating.

Depending on the vehicle condition and road conditions, the warning may not operate. Also, if the system determines that the vehicle is driving around a curve, warnings will occur earlier than during straight-lane driving.

- When the system determines that the driver is driving without holding the steering wheel while the steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.

If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel and the steering wheel assist is operating, the buzzer sounds and the driver is warned. Each time the buzzer sounds, the continuing time of the buzzer becomes longer.

■ Vehicle sway warning function

When the system determines that the vehicle is swaying while the vehicle sway warning function is operating, a buzzer sounds and a warning message urging the driver to rest and the symbol shown in the illustration are simultaneously displayed on the multi-information display.

White icon of a steaming coffee cup on a saucer (no text or symbols)

CTH45BT188

Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.

■Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LTA indicator illuminates in yellow, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. Also, if a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

●“LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”

The system may not be operating properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

●“LTA Unavailable”

The system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the front camera. Turn the LTA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LTA system back on.

●“LTA Unavailable at Current Speed”

The function cannot be used as the vehicle speed exceeds the LTA operation range. Drive slower.

Customization

Function settings can be changed. (→P. 109, 126)

RSA (Road Sign Assist)\*

Summary of function

The RSA system recognizes specific road signs using the front camera and/or navigation system (when speed limit information is available) to provide information to the driver via the display.

Front camera CTH45BT159

If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed limit, performing prohibited actions, etc. according to the recognized road signs, it notifies the driver through a visual notification and notification buzzer*.

*: This setting needs to be customized.

WARNING

Before using the RSA

Do not rely solely upon the RSA system. RSA is a system which supports the driver by providing information, but it is not a replacement for a driver's own vision and awareness. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to the traffic rules.

Indication on the multi-information display

When the front camera recognizes a sign and/or information of a sign is available from the navigation system, the sign will be displayed on the multi-information display.

- When the driving assist system information is selected, a maximum of 3 signs can be displayed. (→P. 104, 117)

NIGHT 45 SPEED LAMP 50 VES CTH45BT261

- When a tab other than the driving assist system information is selected, the following types of road signs will be displayed. (→P. 104, 117)

• Speed limit sign
• Do Not Enter sign (when notification is necessary)

If signs other than speed limit signs are recognized, they will be displayed in an overlapping stack under the current speed limit sign.

SPEED M/F 50 CTH45BT266

Supported types of road signs

The following types of road signs, including electronic signs and blinking signs, are recognized.

A non-official or a recently introduced traffic sign may not be recognized.

Type Multi-information display
Speed limit
Do Not Enter
Stop
Yield

Notification function

In the following situations, the RSA system will notify the driver.

• When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed notification threshold of the speed limit sign displayed, the sign display will be emphasized and a buzzer will sound.
• When the RSA system recognizes a do not enter sign and determines that your vehicle has entered a no-entry area, the displayed sign will flash and a buzzer will sound.

Depending on the situation, a notification function may not operate properly.

Setting procedure

▶ Vehicles with 4.2-inch multi-information display

1 Press / of the meter control switches, select.
2 Press / of the meter control switches, select.
3 Press of the meter control switch. Each time is pressed, the function changes on/off.

▶ Vehicles with 7-inch multi-information display

1 Press / of the meter control switches, select.
2 Press / of the meter control switches, select.
3 Press of the meter control switch. Each time is pressed, the function changes on/off.

■Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display

In the following situations, a displayed speed limit sign and/or do not enter sign will stop being displayed automatically:

●No sign has been recognized for a certain distance.
●The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.

In the following situations, stop and yield signs will stop being displayed automatically:

●The system determines that your vehicle has passed the sign.
●The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.

■ Conditions in which the function may not operate or detect correctly

In the following situations, RSA does not operate normally and may not recognize signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

●The front camera is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.
- Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the windshield near the front camera.
●In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the front camera.
●The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.

●The contrast of electronic sign is low.

● All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.

●The sign is only visible to the front camera for a short amount of time.

● The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.

- If a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, but the sign exists directly after a freeway branches, or in an adjacent lane just before merging.

●Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle.

●A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized.

- Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the front camera) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.

● Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the front camera) while traveling on a roundabout.

●The front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

● The surrounding brightness is not sufficient or changes suddenly.

- When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is recognized.

●The navigation system map data is outdated.

●The navigation system is not operating.

● The speed information displayed on the meter and on the navigation system may be different due to the navigation system using map data.

■Speed limit sign display

If the power switch was last turned off while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-information display, the same sign displays again when the power switch is turned to ON.

If "Road Sign Assist System Malfunction" is shown

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 109, 126)

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Summary of functions

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways.

● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ( P. 291)
● Constant speed control mode ( P. 298)

System Components

■Meter display

① Multi-information display
② Set speed
③ Indicators

① SET 60 MPH ② ③ SET CTH45BT096

Operation switches

① Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
② “+ RES” switch
③ Cruise control main switch
④ Cancel switch
⑤ “- SET” switch

① ② ③ + RES CANCEL - SET ⑤ ④ CTH45BT042

WARNING

■Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

• Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.

• The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to reduce the driver's burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
  Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead: P. 301

• Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly: P. 302

- Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.

Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying solely on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range setting to off, using the cruise control main switch when not in use.

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions.

It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range does not include functions which will prevent or avoid collisions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle. Therefore, if there is ever any possibility of danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

WARNING

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
- On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

●At entrances to freeways and highways

- When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

- When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar or front camera

- In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration

●During emergency towing

- When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may become shorter.

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["②"]
    B --> C["③"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f96,stroke:#333

① Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.

② Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the "+ RES" switch or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not performed, system control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.

When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an over-taking lane while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will accelerate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.

The system's identification of what is an overtaking lane may be determined solely based on the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left side driver position versus right side driver position.) If the vehicle is driven to a region where the overtaking lane is on a different side from where the vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn signal lever is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the driver normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is to the right but then drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the left, the vehicle may accelerate when the right turn signal is activated).

③ Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

1 Press the cruise control main switch to activate the cruise control.

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the switch again to deactivate the cruise control.

Radar Ready CTH45BT119US

If the cruise control main switch is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. ( P. 298)

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and press the “- SET” switch to set the speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.

SET - SET 60 MPH CTH45BT044

Adjusting the set speed

●Adjusting the set speed by the switch

To change the set speed, press the “+ RES” or “- SET” switch until the desired set speed is displayed.

① Increases the speed

(Except when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

② Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Press the switch.

Large adjustment: Press and hold the switch to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.

① + RES - SET ② CTH45BT045

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

For U.S. mainland and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 increments for as long as the switch is held

For Canada and Puerto Rico

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) *1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph)* 2 each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h) *1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)*2 increments for as long as the switch is held

In the constant speed control mode ( P. 298), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^ ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^ ^2 each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the switch is held.

*1: When the set speed is shown in "MPH"

*2: When the set speed is shown in "km/h"

●Increasing the set speed by the accelerator pedal

1 Accelerate with accelerator pedal operation to the desired vehicle speed

2 Press the "- SET" switch

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

① Long
② Medium
③ Short

Preceding vehicle mark ① ② ③ CTH45BT046

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.

Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

After the vehicle ahead of you starts off, press the “+ RES” switch.

Your vehicle will also resume follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off.

+ RES SET Operate Cruise switch or Accelerator Pedal to Resume CTH45BT081US

Canceling and resuming the speed control

① Pressing the cancel switch cancels the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

(When the vehicle has been stopped by system control, depressing the brake pedal does not cancel the setting.)

② + RES CANCEL ① CTH45BT048

② Pressing the “+ RES” switch resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Diagram of a car steering wheel and dashboard with an inset showing a road detection device (no text or symbols present)

■Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.

• When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed
• When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
  ●Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
  ●When depressing the accelerator pedal

Curve speed reduction function

While driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, this function will reduce the vehicle speed, if it is determined to be necessary.

■Function operation

When the steering wheel begins to be turned, the vehicle speed will begin being reduced. When the steering wheel is returned to the center position, the vehicle speed reduction will end.

Depending on the situation, the vehicle speed will then return to the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode set speed.

In situations where vehicle-to-vehicle distance control needs to operate, such as when a preceding vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle, the curve speed reduction function will be canceled.

Operation display

Displayed when the vehicle speed is being reduced.

When the vehicle speed reduction ends, the display will disappear.

CTH45BT256

■ Changing the settings of the curve speed reduction function

The curve speed reduction function can be enabled/disabled and the vehicle speed reduction strength can be adjusted on (2.2- inch display) or ⚙ (7-inch display) (→P. 109, 126) of the multi-information display.

The setting will change each time of the meter control switch is pressed.

Selecting constant speed control mode

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.

1 With the cruise control off, press and hold the cruise control main switch for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on. Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.

CTH45BT098

Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the switch with the cruise control off.

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and press the “- SET” switch to set the speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on.

SET - SET CTH45BT083

The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting: →P. 293

Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P. 295

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when

●The shift lever is in D.
●The desired set speed can be set when the vehicle speed is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

(However, when the vehicle speed is set while driving at below approximately 20 mph [30 km/h], the set speed will be set to approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.

■When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising

• Pressing the “+ RES” switch while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the switch is pressed.
• If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed.

■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period of time.
- When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
●The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
- When the brake control or output restriction control of a driving support system operates. (For example: Pre-Collision System, Drive-Start Control)
●The parking brake is operated.
●The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:

• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
• The driver's door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period of time.
- When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
- When the brake control or output restriction control of a driving support system operates. (For example: Pre-Collision System, Drive-Start Control)

If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■Situations in which the curve speed reduction function may not operate

In situations such as the following, the curve speed reduction function may not operate:

• When the vehicle is being driven around a gentle curve
• When the accelerator pedal is being depressed
• When the vehicle is being driven around an extremely short curve

Brake operation

A brake operation sound may be heard and the brake pedal response may change, but these are not malfunctions.

■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. ( P. 250, 507)

■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning ( P. 296) may not be activated.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

Diagram showing a truck and a car with sensor waves, no text or symbols present

●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
- When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor

- When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

Two cars on a road with motion lines indicating speed or signal transmission (no text or symbols)

●Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance

Illustration of a truck and a car with visible tire tracks (no text or symbols)

Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.

- When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

Three curved road scenarios with cars on each, showing motion patterns (no text or symbols)

- When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

Two identical road scenarios with cars emitting signal waves, no text or symbols present

●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
- When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on a bridge
● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal

■ Situations in which the curve speed reduction function may not operate properly

In situations such as the following, the curve speed reduction function may not operate properly:

• When the vehicle is being driven around a curve on an incline/decline
  ●When the course of the vehicle differs from the shape of the curve
• When the vehicle speed is excessively high when entering a curve
  ●When the steering wheel is suddenly operated

Driving assist systems

To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System)

The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

◆Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)

Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS. Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.

◆Secondary Collision Brake

When the airbag sensor detects a collision and the system operates, the brakes and stop lights are automatically controlled to reduce the vehicle speed and help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision

◆TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆ Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill

◆EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

◆BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)

→P. 310

When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

CTH45BT001

Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may

reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing to

turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off,

quickly press and release .

The "Traction Control Turned Off" will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press again to turn the system back on.

Traction Control Turned Off OFF CTH45BT268US

■Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the "Traction Control Turned Off" will be shown on the multi-information display*.

Press again to turn the systems back on.

*: PCS (Pre-Collision System) will also be disabled (only Pre-Collision warning is available). The pre-collision system warning light will come on and the message will be shown on the multi-information display. (→P. 266)

- When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if has not been pressed

TRAC is temporary deactivated. If the information continues to show, contact your Toyota dealer.

■Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:

● The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward incline)
●The vehicle is stopped
●The accelerator pedal is not depressed
●The parking brake is not engaged

■Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:

●The shift lever is shifted to P or N
●The accelerator pedal is depressed
●The parking brake is engaged
●2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the brake pedal is released

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, and hill-start assist control systems

●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
- Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
- A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.

■ ECB operating sound

ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred.

• Operating sound heard from engine compartment when the brake pedal is operated.
• Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the driver's door is opened.
• Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when one or two minutes passed after the stop of the hybrid system.

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems

After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:

• When the power switch is turned off
• If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases
  If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases

■Secondary Collision Brake operating conditions

The system operates when the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision while the vehicle is in motion.

However, the system does not operate in any of the following situations.

●The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h)
Components are damaged

■Secondary Collision Brake automatic cancellation

The Secondary Collision Brake is automatically canceled in the following situations:

●The vehicle speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
●A certain amount of time elapses during operation
●The accelerator pedal is depressed a large amount

■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

WARNING

■The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
- When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps on the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■Hill- start assist control does not operate effectively when

• Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
  ● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

■When the TRAC/ABS/VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

■Secondary Collision Brake

Do not overly rely solely upon the Secondary Collision Brake. This system is designed to help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision, however, that effect changes according to various conditions. Overly relying on the system may result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)\*

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that uses rear side radar sensors installed on the inner side of the rear bumper on the left and right side to assist the driver in confirming safety when changing lanes.

System components

① Multi-information display Turning the BSM function on/off. (→P. 311)
② Outside rear view mirror indicators

When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.

① ② ③ BSM BSA BSM CTH45BT231

③ “BSM” indicator

When the BSM function is turned on, the indicator illuminates.

Turning the BSM function on/off

▶ Vehicles with 4.2-inch multi-information display

1 Press < / > of the meter control switches, select.

2 Press ∧ / of the meter control switches, select .

3 Press of the meter control switch.

Each time is pressed, the function changes on/off.

▶ Vehicles with 7-inch multi-information display

1 Press ∧/ of the meter control switches, select.

2 Press < / of the meter control switches, select .

3 Press of the meter control switch.

Each time is pressed, the function changes on/off.

Setting the outside rear view mirror indicator brightness

The brightness of the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors can be changed on ⚙ (4.2-inch display) or ⚙ (7-inch display) (→P. 112, 127) of the multi-information display.

■The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

- When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display

Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors. ( P. 312)

The system should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear bumper.

Additionally, the sensors may not operate normally when driving in extremely hot or cold environments.

■When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, a warning message will be displayed:

●There is a malfunction with the sensors
●The sensors have become dirty
●The outside temperature is extremely high or low
●The sensor voltage has become abnormal

WARNING

■To ensure the system can operate properly

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed behind the left and right sides of the rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can function correctly.

- Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times. If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message (→P. 311) will be displayed.

In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation conditions of the BSM function ( P. 315) satisfied for approximately 10 minutes.

Line drawing of a car rear bumper with mounting points (no text or symbols)

If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

- Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong impact.

If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly.

In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.

• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of them has become disconnected.

• Do not disassemble the sensor.

• Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
• Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
• If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to be removed/installed or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
  ●Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Toyota color.

BSM function

The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is usually not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

graph TD
    A["Top Lane"] --> B["Left Road"]
    C["Right Road"] --> D["Left Road"]
    E["Bottom Road"] --> F["Right Road"]
    G["Left Road"] --> H["Left Road"]
    I["Right Road"] --> J["Right Road"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccc,stroke:#333

① Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
② Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

BSM function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

① ② ③ ④ CTH45BT234

The range of the detection area extends to:

① Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle
The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle cannot be detected
② Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
③ Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
④ Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The BSM function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the BSM function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

■The BSM function is operational when

●The BSM function is turned on
●Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■The BSM function will detect a vehicle when

●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
- Your vehicle overtakes a vehicle in an adjacent lane slowly.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■Conditions under which the system will not detect a vehicle

The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc. *
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
- Following vehicles that are in the same lane*

● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*

●Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle

*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

Conditions under which the system may not function correctly

● The BSM function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

- When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper

- When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

- When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates

- When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip on the road, etc.

- When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

- When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle

- When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle

- When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle

- When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

- Directly after the BSM function is turned on

- Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the detection area is short
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips on the road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

Intuitive parking assist\*

The distance from your vehicle to nearby objects when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

Types of sensors

① Front corner sensors
② Front center sensors
③ Rear corner sensors
④ Rear center sensors

① ② ① ③ ④ ③ CTH45BT229

Turning the intuitive parking assist on/off

1 Press ∧ / of the meter control switches, select .
2 Press < / > of the meter control switches, select.
3 Press of the meter control switch.

When the intuitive parking assist function is disabled, the intuitive parking assist OFF indicator ( P. 97) illuminates.

To re-enable the system, select 📂 on the multi-information display, select 📃 and turn it on.

If the system is disabled, it will remain off even if the power switch is turned to ON mode after the power switch has been turned off.

Display

When the sensors detect an object, the following displays inform the driver of the position and distance to the object.

① Front corner sensor operation

② Front center sensor operation

③ Rear corner sensor operation

④ Rear center sensor operation

⑤ Select to mut sounds.

e the buzzer 3 4 5 CK P# Mute Temporarity CTH45BT235US

■Muting the buzzer sound

●To mute the buzzer sound

The buzzer can be temporarily muted by pressing of the meter control switches while an object detection display is shown on the multi-information display.

●To cancel the mute

Mute will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.

• When the shift position is changed
• When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain speed.
• When the intuitive parking assist is turned off once and turned on again
• When the power switch is turned off once and turned to ON mode again
• When a sensor is malfunctioning

Sensor detection display, object distance

■Distance display

Display	Approximate distance to object
		Front and rear center sensor	Front and rear corner sensor
	Far↑	Front center sensor:3.3 ft. (100 cm) to2.0 ft. (60 cm)Rear center sensor:4.9 ft. (150 cm) to2.0 ft. (60 cm)	—
		2.0 ft. (60 cm) to1.5 ft. (45 cm)	2.0 ft. (60 cm) to1.5 ft. (45 cm)
		1.5 ft. (45 cm) to1.0 ft. (30 cm)	1.5 ft. (45 cm) to1.0 ft. (30 cm)
		1.0 ft. (30 cm) to0.5 ft. (15 cm)	1.0 ft. (30 cm) to0.5 ft. (15 cm)
	Near	Less than0.5 ft. (15 cm)	Less than0.5 ft. (15 cm)

■Buzzer operation and distance to an object

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.

● The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an object. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the object, the buzzer sounds continuously: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm).
- When 2 or more objects are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest object. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.
●Automatic buzzer mute function

After a buzzer begins sounding, if the distance between the vehicle and the detected object does not become shorter, the buzzer will be muted automatically.

(However, if the distance between the vehicle and object is 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less, this function will not operate.)

Detection range of the sensors

① Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
② Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
③ Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect objects that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc.

① ② ③ ③ CTH45BT026

Changing the buzzer sounds volume

The buzzer volume can be changed on the multi-information display ( P. 128) when the power switch is in ON mode.

■The system can be operated when

●The power switch is in ON mode.
●Intuitive parking assist function is on.
●The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
●The shift lever is in other than P.

If “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-information display

A sensor may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the sensor, the system should return to normal.

Also, due to the sensor being frozen at low temperatures, a malfunction display may appear or an object may not be detected. If the sensor thaws out, the system should return to normal.

If “Parking Assist Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display

Water may be continuously flowing over the sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain. When the system determines that it is normal, the system will return to normal.

■Sensor detection information

• The sensor's detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle's front and rear bumpers.
  ●The following situations may occur during use.

• Depending on the shape of the object and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

• Detection may be impossible if static objects draw too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between static object detection and display (warning buzzer sounds). Even at low speeds, there is a possibility that the object will come within 1.0 ft. (30 cm) before the display is shown and the warning buzzer sounds.
• It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due to the volume of the audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system.
• It may be difficult to hear the sound of this system due to the buzzers of other systems.

■ Objects which the system may not be properly detected

The shape of the object may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following objects:

●Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
●Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
● Sharply-angled objects
●Low objects
● Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

■Situations in which the system may not operate properly

Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow, water drops or ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.)
  ●A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the sensor display may be displayed abnormally, or objects, such as a wall, may not be detected.

- When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold.

Two identical cartoon-style illustrations of a car emitting exhaust smoke, with a person observing below (no text or symbols)

● On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
- When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
●A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
- If objects draw too close to the sensor.
- When a pedestrian is wearing clothing that does not reflect ultrasonic waves (ex. skirts with gathers or frills).
- When objects that are not perpendicular to the ground, not perpendicular to the vehicle traveling direction, uneven, or waving are in the detection range.
●Strong wind is blowing
- When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
- When an object that cannot be detected is between the vehicle and a detected object
- If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the vehicle or runs out from the side of the vehicle
- If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact
- When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
- If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
- When a tire chains or compact spare tire is used

■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

In some situations, such as the following, the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

- When driving on a narrow road

Top-down diagram of a car parked near a corner with a vehicle, no text or symbols present

- When driving toward a banner, flag, low-hanging branch or boom barrier (such as those used at railroad crossings, toll gates and parking lots)

- When there is a rut or hole in the surface of the road

- When driving on a metal cover (grating), such as those used for drainage ditches

●When driving up or down a steep slope

- If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road

There is dirt, snow, water drops or ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.)

●A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain

●When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

●When strong winds are blowing

Illustration of a car emitting exhaust smoke with falling leaves, no text or symbols present

- When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

- If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact

●The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb

● Driving close to columns (H-shaped steel beams, etc.) in multi-story parking garages, construction sites, etc.

- If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning

● On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass

Illustration of a car driving on a road with grass and water below (no text or symbols)

- When a tire chains or compact spare tire is used

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the system

There is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

■To ensure the system can operate properly

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

• Do not damage the sensors, and always keep them clean.
• Do not attach a sticker or install an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna near a radar sensor.
• Do not subject the surrounding area of the sensor to a strong impact. If subjected to an impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. If the front or rear bumper needs to be removed/installed or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
  ●Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors.
• Do not attach a license plate cover.
• Keep your tires properly inflated.

■When to disable the function

In the following situations, disable the function as it may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

● Failing to observe the warnings above.
● A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.

WARNING

■Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

• When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.
• When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.
• When using an automatic car wash, disable the intuitive parking assist.

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)\*

The RCTA function uses the BSM rear side radar sensors installed behind the rear bumper. This function is intended to assist the driver in checking areas that are not easily visible when backing up.

System components

R×θ ① RCTA ② θrR ③ RCTA ④ ⑤ CTH45BT238

① Multi-information display

Turning the RCTA function on/off. ( P. 327)

② Outside rear view mirror indicators

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.

③ “RCTA” indicator

When the RCTA function is turned on, the indicator illuminates.

④ Audio system screen

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the RCTA icon ( P. 328) for the detected side will be displayed. This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from both sides of the vehicle.

⑤ RCTA buzzer

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat.

Turning the RCTA function on/off

▶ Vehicles with 4.2-inch multi-information display

1 Press < / of the meter control switches, select .

2 Press ∧ / of the meter control switches, select .

3 Press of the meter control switch.

Each time is pressed, the function changes on/off.

▶ Vehicles with 7-inch multi-information display

1 Press ∧/ of the meter control switches, select .

2 Press < / of the meter control switches, select.

3 Press of the meter control switch.

Each time is pressed, the function changes on/off.

Setting the buzzer volume

The volume of the RCTA buzzer can be changed on 4.2 -inch display) or (7-inch display) ( P. 112, 128) of the multi-information display.

■The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■RCTA buzzer hearing

RCTA function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

■Muting the buzzer sound

The buzzer can be temporarily muted by pressing OK of the meter control switches while an object detection display is shown on the multi-information display.

- When “Rear Cross Traffic Alert Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display

Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors. ( P. 312)

The system should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear bumper.

Additionally, the sensors may not operate normally when driving in extremely hot or cold environments.

■Rear side radar sensors

→P. 312

RCTA function

The RCTA functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle's existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    C["1"] --> D["2"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccc,stroke:#333

① Approaching vehicles Detection areas

■RCTA icon display (if equipped)

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the following will be displayed on the audio system screen.

Toyota parking assist monitor	Panoramic view monitor	Content
		A vehicle is approaching from the left or right at the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the system

There is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely. (→P.314)

■To ensure the system can operate properly

→P. 312

RCTA function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

① CTH45BT068

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away.

Example:

Approaching vehicle Speed	1 Approximate alert distance
Fast 18 mph (28 km/h) 65 ft. (20 m)
Slow 5 mph (8 km/h) 18 ft. (5.5 m)

■The RCTA function is operational when

●The power switch is in ON mode.
●The RCTA function is turned on.
●The shift lever is in R.
●The vehicle speed is approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
● The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h).

Conditions under which the system will not detect a vehicle

The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle *

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

CTH45BT015

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
● The distance between the sensor and approaching vehicle gets too close

*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■Situations in which the system may not operate properly

The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc., is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the position above the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
  ●When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
• When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

- When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade

Diagram showing two scenarios of cars moving on a road, with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

- When backing out of a sharp angle parking spot

CTH45BT021

- When towing a trailer

- When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

●When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold

- If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed

- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

●When turning while backing up

CTH45BT020

- When a vehicle turns into the detection area

CTH45BT024

■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

Instances of the RCTA function unnecessary detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:

- When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street

CTH45BT016

- When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sigh, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B["Top Right"]
    C["Car"] --> D["Bottom Left"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

- When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

- When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle

CTH45BT018

●When a detected vehicle turns while approaching the vehicle

CTH45BT017

- When there are spinning objects near your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit

- When water is splashed or sprayed a sprinkler

- Moving objects (flags, exhaust fumes, large rain droplets or snowflakes, rain water on the road surface, etc.)

• When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc., that enters the detection area is short
  ●Gratings and gutters
• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold
• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)\*

When the vehicle is backing up, the rear camera detection function can detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle. If a pedestrian is detected, a buzzer will sound and an icon on the audio system screen will be displayed to inform the driver of the pedestrian.

Display

▶ Toyota parking assist monitor

▶ Panoramic view monitor

① ② RCD OFF CTH45BT257

① ② RCD OFF ③ ④ CTH45BT258

① Pedestrian detection icon

Displayed automatically when a pedestrian is detected.

② RCD OFF icon

When the RCD function is disabled, the RCD OFF icon illuminates.

Turning the rear camera detection function on/off

▶ Vehicles with 4.2-inch multi-information display

1 Press < / of the meter control switches, select .

2 Press ∧/ of the meter control switches, select .

3 Press of the meter control switch.

When the RCD function is disabled, the RCD OFF indicator ( P. 97) illuminates.

▶ Vehicles with 7-inch multi-information display

1 Press ∧ / of the meter control switches, select .

2 Press < / > of the meter control switches, select.

3 Press of the meter control switch.

When the RCD function is disabled, the RCD OFF indicator ( P. 97) illuminates.

When a pedestrian is detected

If the rear camera detection function detects a pedestrian in the detection area, the buzzer and icon will operate as shown in the following table:

① ② ③ CTH45BT075

Area Buzzer Icon
1	Sounds repeatedly	Blinks 3 times and then stays on
2	When the vehicle is stationary: Sounds 3 timesWhen the vehicle is backing up: Sounds repeatedly
3	When it is determined that a pedestrian will enter area 1 within a few seconds: Sounds repeatedly	When it is determined that a pedestrian will enter area 1 within a few seconds: Blinks 3 times and then stays on

■The rear camera detection function is operational when

The rear camera detection function is operational when the following conditions are met:

●The power switch is in the ON mode.
●RCD function is on.
●The shift lever is in R.

Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted with the RCTA buzzer volume on the multi-information display. ( P. 112, 128)

■Muting the buzzer sound

The buzzer can be temporarily muted by pressing OK of the meter control switches while an object detection display is shown on the multi-information display.

If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable Remove the Dirt of Rear Camera” is displayed on the multi-information display

A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the rear camera lens, the system should return to normal. (It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for some time before the system returns to normal.)

If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display

• If this message is displayed after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected and reconnected, fully turn the steering wheel to the left and then the right on level ground.
• If this message is displayed only when the R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the rear camera lens.

■Situations in which the system may not operate properly

Some pedestrians, such as the following, may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:

• Pedestrians who are squatting
• Pedestrians who are lying down
  • Pedestrians who are running
• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the detection area
• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard, or other light vehicle
• Pedestrians wearing unusual clothing, such as a costume
• Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by a cart or other object
• Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night

- In some situations, such as the following, pedestrians may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:

• When backing up in inclement weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• When a very bright light, such as the sun, or the headlights of another vehicle, shines directly into the rear camera
• When backing up in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a garage or underground parking lot
• When backing up in a dim environment such as during dusk or in an underground parking lot
• When the camera position and direction are deviated

• When a towing hook is attached

• When water droplets are flowing on the camera lens

• When the vehicle height is extremely changed (nose up, nose down)
• When tire chains is used

■Situations in which the system may operate unexpectedly

● Even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area, some objects, such as the following, may be detected, possibly causing the rear camera detection function to operate.

• Three dimensional objects, such as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle
• Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle
• Objects moving toward your vehicle when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne matter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or snow)
• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails, road repairs, white lines, pedestrian crossings or fallen leaves on the road
• Metal covers (gratings), such as those used for drainage ditches
• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet road surface
• Shadows on the road

- In some situations, such as the following, the rear camera detection function may operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area.

• When backing up toward the roadside or a bump on the road
• When backing up toward an incline/decline
• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper
• If the orientation of the rear camera has been changed
• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• When water is flowing over the rear camera lens
• If there is a flashing light in the detection area, such as the emergency flashers of another vehicle
• When a tire chains is used

● Situations in which the rear camera detection function may be difficult to notice

• If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the surrounding area is noisy, the volume of the audio system volume is high, the air conditioning system is being used, etc.
• If the temperature in the cabin is extremely high or low, the audio system screen may not operate correctly.

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the system

The recognition and control capabilities for this system are limited.

The driver should always drive safely by always being responsible without over relying on the system and have a understanding of the surrounding situations.

■To ensure the system can operate properly

Observe the following, otherwise there is the danger that could lead to an accident.

●Always clean the camera without damaging it.
- Do not install market electronic parts (such as Illuminated license plate, fog lamps, etc.) in the camera vicinity.
- Do not subject the camera vicinity to strong impacts. If the vicinity is subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer
- Do not disassemble, remodel or paint the camera.
- Do not attach accessories or stickers to the camera.
- Do not install market protection parts (bumper trim, etc.) to the rear bumper.
●Maintain suitable tire air pressure.
Make sure the trunk is completely closed.

■RCD function is turned off

In the following situations the system turns off. The RCD function may not operate properly and thus there is the danger that an accident may occur.

●The contents mentioned above are not observed.
● Suspensions other than Toyota genuine parts are installed.

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)\*

The Parking Support Brake system consists of the following functions that operate when driving at a low speed or backing up, such as when parking. When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action. If the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system

■Parking Support Brake function (static objects)

Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect static objects, such as a wall, in the detection area when driving at a low speed or backing up. ( P. 348)

■Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)

Rear radar sensors are used to detect approaching vehicles in the detection area behind the vehicle when backing up. ( P. 352)

Types of sensors

① Front corner sensors
② Front center sensors
③ Rear corner sensors
④ Rear center sensors

① ② ① ③ ④ ③ CTH45BT229

Turning the Parking Support Brake on/off

The Parking Support Brake can be enabled/disabled on the multi-information display. All of the Parking Support Brake functions (static objects and rear-crossing vehicles) are enabled/disabled simultaneously.

Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the parking support brake. ( P. 109, 126)

1 Press ∧ / of the meter control switches, select.

2 Press < / > of the meter control switches, select.

3 Press of the meter control switch.

4 Select the "Yes" and push . OK

When the Parking Support Brake is disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator illuminates.

To re-enable the system when it was disabled, select on the multi-information display, select and then "On". If disabled using this method, the system will not be re-enabled by turning the power switch off and then to ON mode.

Displays and buzzers for hybrid system output restriction control and brake control

If the hybrid system output restriction control or brake control operates, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

Depending on the situation, hybrid system output restriction control will operate to either limit acceleration or restrict output as much as possible.

Control Situation	Multi-information display	PKSB OFF Indicator	Buzzer
Hybrid system output restriction control is operating (acceleration restriction)	Acceleration greater than a certain amount is not possible.	“Object Detected Acceleration Reduced”	Not illuminated	No beep
Hybrid system output restriction control is operating (output restricted as much as possible)	Stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary.	“Brake!”	Not illuminated	Short beep
Brake control is operating	Emergency braking is necessary.
Vehicle stopped by system operation (When accelerator is stepped on)	The vehicle has been stopped by brake control operation.	“Switch to Brake”	Illuminated	Short beep
Vehicle stopped by system operation (When accelerator is not stepped on)	The vehicle has been stopped by brake control operation.	“Brake”	Illuminated	Short beep

Parking Support Brake function

If the Parking Support Brake function detects that a collision with an object is possible, the hybrid system output will be restricted to restrain any increase in the vehicle speed. (Hybrid system output restriction control: See A below.)

Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See B below.)

graph TD
    A["Car with Brake"] --> B{On/Off}
    B -->|① Off ② Off| C["Brake!"]
    B -->|③ Off ④ Off| D["Switch to Brake"]
    E["Car with Brake"] --> F{On/Off}
    F -->|① Off ② Off| G["Brake!"]
    F -->|③ Off ④ Off| H["Switch to Brake"]
    I["Down"] --> J["Brake!"]
    K["Up"] --> L["Switch to Brake"]

① Accelerator pedal
② Brake pedal
③ Hybrid system output
④ Braking force

⑤ Start of control
⑥ High possibility of a collision
⑦ Extremely high possibility of a collision

If the Parking Support Brake function has operated

If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake function, the Parking Support Brake system will be disabled and the PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the Parking Support Brake operates unnecessarily, brake control can be canceled by depressing the brake pedal or waiting for approximately 2 seconds for it to automatically be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be operated by depressing the accelerator pedal.

■Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake system

To re-enable the Parking Support Brake system when it is disabled due to operation of the Parking Support Brake function, either enable the system again ( P. 341), or turn the power switch off and then back to ON mode.

Additionally, if the object becomes no longer in the traveling direction of the vehicle or if the traveling direction of the vehicle changes (such as changing from moving forward to backing up, or from backing up to moving forward), the system will be re-enabled automatically.

If “PKSB Unavailable” and “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean Parking Assist Sensor” are displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is illuminating

● A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. In this case, remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal. If this message is shown even after removing dirt from the sensor, or shown when the sensor was not dirty to begin with, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.
● A sensor may be frozen. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.
● Water may be continuously flowing over the sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain. When the system determines that it is normal, the system will return to normal.

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the system

Do not overly rely on the system, as doing so may lead to an accident.

Always drive while checking the safety of the surroundings of the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, weather, etc., the system may not operate.

The detection capabilities of sensors and radars are limited. Always drive while checking the safety of the surroundings of the vehicle.

● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive carefully, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Parking Support Brake system is designed to provide support to lessen the severity of collisions. However, it may not operate in some situations.
●The Parking Support Brake system is not designed to stop the vehicle completely. Additionally, even if the system has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal immediately as brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.
It is extremely dangerous to check the system operations by intentionally driving the vehicle into the direction of a wall, etc. Never attempt such actions.

■When to disable the Parking Support Brake

In the following situations, disable the Parking Support Brake as the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

• When inspecting the vehicle using a chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free roller
• When loading the vehicle onto a boat, truck or other transport vessel
• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
  ● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
  ●When using automatic car washing devices
• If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
  ●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
• When the tires are not properly inflated
• When the tires are very worn
• When a tire chains or compact spare tire is used

NOTICE

If “PKSB Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is illuminating

If this message is displayed immediately after the power switch is turned to ON mode, operate the vehicle carefully, paying attention to your surroundings. It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for a certain amount of time before the system returns to normal. (If the system is not return to normal after driving for a while, clean the sensors and their surrounding area on the bumpers.)

Parking Support Brake function (static objects)\*

If a collision with an object may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the sensors detect objects, such as a wall, in the traveling direction of the vehicle, and the system operates to lessen an impact with an object and reduce the resulting damage.

Examples of system operation

The system will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late

CTH45BT003

■When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively

CTH45BT230

■ When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected

CTH45BT005

■The Parking Support Brake function (static objects) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated ( P. 341, 345) and all of the following conditions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake system is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• There is an object in the traveling direction of the vehicle and approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away.
• The system determines that a stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.

●Brake control

• Hybrid system output restriction control is operating.
• The system determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.

■ The Parking Support Brake function (static objects) will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:

● Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake system is disabled.
• The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation.
• The object is no longer approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake system is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The object is no longer approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■ Detection range of the Parking Support Brake function (static objects)

The detection range of the Parking Support Brake function differs from the detection range of the intuitive parking assist. ( P. 320)

Therefore, even if the intuitive parking assist detects an object and provides a warning, the Parking Support Brake function may not start operating.

■Situations in which the system may not operate properly

→P. 322

■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

→P. 323

WARNING

■To ensure the system can operate properly
→P. 324
If the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing
→P. 345
■Notes when washing the vehicle
→P. 325

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)\*

If a radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an impact with the approaching vehicle.

Examples of system operation

The system will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late

Illustration of a row of cars with sound waves, no text or symbols present

■ The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated ( P. 341, 345) and all of the following conditions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
- The vehicle speed is approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
- Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
• The shift lever is in R.
- The system determines that a stronger than normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.

●Brake control

• Hybrid system output restriction control is operating.
• The system determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.

■ The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
- The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation.
- A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

■ Detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)

The detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) differs from the detection area of the RCTA function ( P. 330).

Therefore, even if the RCTA function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not start operating.

■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly

→P. 331

■ Situations in which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

→P. 333

WARNING

■To ensure the system can operate properly →P. 312

Driving mode select switches

The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

ECO MODE SPORT ② ① ③ ECO NORMAL SPORT CTH45BT222

① Normal mode

Use for normal driving.

While in Eco drive mode or sport mode, press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode.

② Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.

When the "ECO" switch is pressed, the "ECO MODE" indicator comes on in the instrument cluster.

③ Sport mode

Use sport mode when increased acceleration response and precise handling is desired, for example, when driving on mountain roads.

When the "SPORT" switch is pressed, the "SPORT" indicator comes on in the instrument cluster.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency ( P. 366). To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.

■Auto Glide Control

●While driving in Eco drive mode with D selected, releasing the accelerator pedal will activate Auto Glide Control under certain conditions. (Auto Glide Control may activate before the accelerator pedal is fully released.)

When Auto Glide Control operates, the electric motor (traction motor) will be controlled, reducing the deceleration force and allowing the vehicle to coast, enhancing fuel economy.

AGC CTH45BT223

When Auto Glide Control operates, the AGC indicator light will illuminate.

●Auto Glide Control may not operate in the following situations:

• When the brake pedal is depressed
• When a shift position other than D is selected
• When the vehicle speed is approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) or lower
• When the vehicle is accelerating on a downward slope
• When the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is operating
• When the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating
• When the Parking Support Brake system is operating
• When the TRAC or VSC system is operating
• When the TRAC or VSC system is disabled by pressing the VSC OFF switch

■Sport mode automatic deactivation

Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving in sport mode.

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:

◆ Using Eco drive mode

When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. ( P. 355)

◆Use of Hybrid System Indicator

The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the needle of Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area. ( P. 102)

◆Shift lever operation

Shift the shift lever to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traffic etc. Shift the shift lever to P when parking. When using the N, there is no positive effect on fuel consumption. In the N, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. Also, when using the air conditioning system, etc., the hybrid battery (traction battery) power is consumed.

◆Accelerator pedal/brake pedal operation

●Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
●Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

When braking

Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in a timely manner. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

Delays

Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel economy. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When driving in a traffic jam, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

Highway driving

Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

Air conditioning

Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce excessive gasoline consumption.

In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning system and reduce fuel consumption as well.

In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until it and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

◆ Checking tire inflation pressure

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel economy.

Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel economy. Use tires that are appropriate for the season.

Luggage

Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack will also cause poor fuel economy.

◆Warming up before driving

Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess fuel consumption.

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

• Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
  • Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
  ● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.
  ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.
  Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

• Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
  ●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
• Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
• Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

●Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

- If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P^* .

*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Selecting tire chains

▶ Vehicles with 16 and 17-inch tires

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain:

① 0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
② 0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
③ 1.18 in. (30 mm) in length

Cross chain:

④ 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
⑤ 0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
⑥ 0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

▶ Vehicles with 18-inch tires

Tire chains cannot be mounted.

Snow tires should be used instead.

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ CTH46AP001

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

■Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 — 1/2 mile (0.5 — 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

WARNING

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
- Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

- Driving with tire chains (vehicles with 16 and 17-inch tires)

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

• Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
  ● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

- Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

- Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

●Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) system.

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with 16 and 17-inch tires)

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

Interior features

5

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system.... 366

Heated steering wheel/ seat heaters/ seat ventilators.... 375

5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list 378

- Interior lights .... 379

• Personal lights ...... 380

5-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 381

• Glove box.... 382
• Console box...... 382
• Coin holder 382
• Bottle holders.... 383
  • Cup holders 384
• Auxiliary boxes...... 385
• Open tray 386

Trunk features...... 387

5-4. Other interior features

Other interior features ..... 388

• Sun visors...... 388
• Vanity mirrors...... 388
• Power outlet...... 389
• USB charging ports..... 390
- Wireless charger...... 392
- Armrest 401
- Assist grips .... 401
- Coat hooks...... 402

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Air conditioning controls

68.0 AUTO 68.0 SYNC OFF A/C CETH61BT029

■Adjusting the temperature setting

To adjust the temperature setting, turn clockwise to increase

the temperature and counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.

If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and synchro-

nized modes each time is pressed.

Synchronized modes (indicator on):

The driver's side ☐ dial can be used to adjust the temperature for the driver's and front passenger's side. At this time, operate the front

passenger's side SYNC dial to enter individual mode.

Individual modes (indicator off):

The temperature for the driver's and front passenger's side can be adjusted separately.

■Fan speed setting

To adjust the fan speed, press to increase the fan speed

and to decrease the fan speed.

Press *OFF to turn the fan off.

■ Change the airflow mode

To change the airflow mode,

The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.

① Air flows to the upper body.
② Air flows to the upper body and feet.
③ Air flows to the feet.
④ Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

① ② ③ ④ 680 * **** 680 * OFF * * A/C CTH61BT086

Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW)

This function automatically controls the air conditioning airflow so that priority is given to the front seats. When the front passenger seat is not occupied, airflow may switch to only the driver's seat. Unnecessary air conditioning is suppressed, contributing to increased fuel efficiency.

Front seat concentrated airflow mode operates in the following situations.

●No passengers are detected in the rear seats
●The windshield defogger is not operating

While operating, indicator illuminates.

■ Manually turning front seat concentrated airflow mode on/off

In front seat concentrated airflow mode, directing airflow to the front seats only and to all seats can be switched via switch operation. When the mode has been switched manually, automatic airflow control stops operating.

Press on the air conditioning operation panel and switch the airflow.

●Indicator illuminated: Airflow to the front seats only
●Indicator off: Airflow to all the seats

Operation of automatic airflow control

In order to maintain a comfortable interior, airflow may be directed to seats without passengers immediately after the hybrid system is started and at other times depending on the outside temperature.
● After the hybrid system is started, if passengers move around inside or enter/exit the vehicle, the system cannot accurately detect the presence of passengers and automatic airflow control will not operate.

■Operation of manual airflow control

Even if the function is manually switched to directing airflow to only the front seats, when a rear seat is occupied, it may automatically direct airflow to all seats.

■To return to automatic airflow control

1 With the indicator off, turn the power switch off.
2 After 60 minutes or more elapse, turn the power switch to ON.

Using automatic mode

1 Press

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

2 Adjust the temperature setting.

3 To stop the operation, press

■Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.

Other functions

■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Press

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is defogged.

■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

▶ Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers

A defogger is used to defog the rear window.

Press

The defogger will automatically turn off after a period of time.

▶ Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

Air outlets

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume change according to the selected airflow mode.

*: If equipped

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and dashboard controls (no text or symbols)

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

▶ Front ▶ Rear (if equipped)

① ② CTH61BT083

CTH61BT013

① Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
② Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow

immediately after is pressed.

■Fogging up of the windows

● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

• If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
  ●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

• Setting to the recirculated air mode temporarily is recommended in preventing dirty air from entering the vehicle interior and helping to cool the vehicle when the outside air temperature is high.
  ● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75^ F ( 24^ C) and the air conditioning system is on

• In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.
  ● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is turned to ON mode.
• It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■When the outside temperature is low

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

- In the Eco drive mode, “ECO” is displayed on the air conditioning screen and the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

- Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/ cooling capacity - Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

● To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

- Adjust the fan speed - Turn off Eco drive mode

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

●To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

Air conditioning filter

→P. 463

■Air conditioning system refrigerant

●A label regarding the refrigerant of the air conditioning system is attached to the hood at the location shown in the illustration.

Line drawing of a car engine compartment with an open hood and arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

●The meaning of each symbol on the label are as follows:

Caution

Requires registered technician to service air conditioning system

Air conditioning system Flammable refrigerant

Air conditioning system lubricant type

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P. 575)

WARNING

■To prevent the windshield from fogging up

- Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

- Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

CTH61BT084

■ To prevent burns (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is stopped.

When repairing/replacing parts of the air conditioning system

Have repair/replacement performed by your Toyota dealer.

When a part of the air conditioning system, such as the evaporator, is to be replaced, it must be replaced with a new one.

Heated steering wheel\*/seat heaters\*/seat ventilators \*

Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering wheel and seats, respectively. Seat ventilators maintain good ventilation by pulling air through the seat upholstery.

WARNING

■To prevent minor burn injuries

Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on:

● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
●Persons with sensitive skin
●Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

■To prevent damage to the seat heaters

Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheating

• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.
• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

NOTICE

• Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
  ● To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the functions when the hybrid system is off.

Heated steering wheel

Turns the heated steering wheel on/off

The indicator light comes on when the heated steering wheel is operating.

CTH61BT041

Operation condition

The heated steering wheel can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.

Seat heaters

▶ Without seat ventilators

▶ With seat ventilators

CTH61BT001

CTH61BT036

Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows.

Hi (3 segments lit) → Mid (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 segment lit) → Off The level indicator (amber) lights up during operation.

Operation condition

The seat heaters can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.

Seat ventilators

Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows.

Hi (3 segments lit) → Mid (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 segment lit) → Off

The level indicator (green) lights up during operation.

CTH61BT037

■The seat ventilators can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Air conditioning system-linked control mode

When a seat ventilator is set to Hi, the fan speed of the seat ventilator may increase according to the fan speed of the air conditioning system

Interior lights list

Diagram of a car interior with numbered parts and lighting indicators, likely for safety or diagnostic purposes.

① Front interior/personal lights ( P. 379, 380)
② Shift lever light (if equipped)
③ Inside door handle lights (if equipped)
④ Rear interior light (if equipped) ( P. 379)
⑤ Rear personal lights (if equipped) ( P. 380)
⑥ Door courtesy lights (if equipped)
⑦ Instrument panel ornament light (if equipped)
⑧ Front center console light (if equipped)
⑨ Footwell lights (if equipped)

Interior lights

■Front (if equipped)

The rear personal lights (if equipped) turn on/off together with the front interior light.

① Turns the lights on/off linked to door positions
② Turns the lights on/off

POM ① ② CTH62BT037

■Rear (if equipped)

① Turns the light off
② Turns the light on/off linked to door positions
③ Turns the light on

① ② ③ CTH62BT033

Personal lights

Front

Turns the lights on/off

P208 CTH62BT038

■Rear (if equipped)

Turns the lights on/off

CTH62BT005

■Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to the power switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.

■To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged

If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

■The interior lights may turn on automatically when

If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the interior lights will turn on automatically.

The interior lights will turn off automatically after approximately 20 minutes.

The interior lights can be turned off manually. However, in order to help prevent further collisions, it is recommended that they be left on until safety can be ensured.

(The interior lights may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.)

Customization

Some functions can be customized. ( P. 575)

List of storage features

① ② ③ ③ ⑦ ⑥ ④ ⑤ ① ④ CTH63BT061

① Auxiliary boxes ( P. 385)
② Glove box ( P. 382)
③ Bottle holders/door pockets

$$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 3 8 3) $$

④ Cup holders ( P. 384)

⑤ Console box ( P. 382)
⑥ Auxiliary box/open tray (→P. 385, 386)
⑦ Coin holder ( P. 382)

WARNING

- Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

- Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

- Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

- When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed.

In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the glove box.

Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt switch and a device inside the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.

Console box

Push the knob.

CTH63BT003

Coin holder

Pull the lever to open.

CTH63BT063

Bottle holders

▶ Front ▶ Rear

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard, with a magnified inset highlighting the wheel (no text or symbols present)

• When storing a bottle, close the cap.
  ●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

WARNING

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glass or paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glass cups may break.

Cup holders

▶ Front ▶ Rear

Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and rear seats with a highlighted arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Pull the armrest down.

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury.

■To prevent burns

To prevent burns, cover hot drinks when placed in the cup holders.

Auxiliary boxes

▶ Type A (if equipped)

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard shift mechanism with arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

▶ Type B (if equipped)

Technical diagram of a car seatbelt with a close-up inset showing a device (no text or symbols present)

Push the lid.

▶ Type C

Interior view of a car showing two side-by-side views of a vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Opening:

Push the tray forward until it locks.

Closing:

Push the tray forward to release the lock and the tray will automatically close.

■When small items are placed on top of the tray (type C)

The tray can be opened while small items are placed on it.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with no visible text or symbols

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for storing (type A)

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

■When opening or closing the tray (type C)

● To prevent damaging small items, when opening the tray while small items are placed on it, make sure the items will not get caught.
● To prevent damaging the tray, do not pull the tray to close it. Doing so may damage the tray.

Open tray

Interior view of a car showing a driver's seat, steering wheel, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

■When using wireless charger (if equipped)

→P. 392

WARNING

Observe the following precautions when putting items in the open tray. Failure to do so may cause items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of sudden braking or steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause driver distraction, resulting in an accident.

• Do not store items in the tray that can easily shift or roll out.
• Do not stack items in the tray higher than the tray's edge.
• Do not put items in the tray that may protrude over the tray's edge.

Trunk features

Grocery bag hooks

Diagram of a car interior showing a handle and seat, with an inset close-up of the seat (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hooks, do not apply too much load to the hooks.

Other interior features

Sun visors

① To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
② To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.
③ To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

① ② ③ CTH64BT018

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open.

Vehicles with vanity lights: The light turns on when the cover is opened.

Diagram of a car seatbelt switch with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with vanity lights: If the vanity lights remain on for 20 minutes while the hybrid system is off, the lights will turn off automatically.

Power outlet

Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).

Open the lid.

12W/120W CTH64BT080

■The power outlet can be used when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■When stopping the hybrid system

Disconnect electrical devices with charging functions, such as mobile battery packs.

If such devices are left connected, the hybrid system may not stop normally.

NOTICE

● To avoid damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when it is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
● To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

USB charging ports

The USB charging ports are used to supply 2.5 A (USB Type-A port) or 3.0 A (USB Type-C port) of electricity at 5 V to external devices.

The USB charging ports are for charging only. They are not designed for data transfer or other purposes.

Depending on the external device, it may not charge properly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port.

■Using the USB charging ports

Open the console box lid and open the lid.

CTH64BT082

■The USB charging ports can be used when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■ Situations in which the USB charging ports may not operate correctly

• If a device which consumes more than 2.5 A at 5 V (USB Type-A port) or 3.0 A at 5 V (USB Type-C port) is connected
• If a device designed to communicate with a personal computer, such as a USB memory device, is connected
• If the connected external device is turned off (depending on device)
• If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked in the sun

■ About connected external devices

Depending on the connected external device, charging may occasionally be suspended and then start again. This is not a malfunction.

■Cable pass through

The shape of the console box rim allows power cables to be passed through when the console box lid is closed.

Diagram showing a car's seatbelt switch with an inset close-up of the cable (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the USB charging ports

• Do not insert foreign objects into the ports.
• Do not spill water or other liquids into the ports.
• When the USB charging ports are not in use, close the lids. If a foreign object or liquid enters a port may cause a short circuit.
• Do not apply excessive force to or impact the USB charging ports.
• Do not disassemble or modify the USB charging ports.

■To prevent damage to external devices

• Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an external device.
• Do not push down on or apply unnecessary force to an external device or the cable of an external device while it is connected.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the USB charging ports for a long period of time with the hybrid system stopped.

Wireless charger (if equipped)

A portable device, such as a smartphone or mobile battery, can be charged by just placing it on the charging area, provided the device is compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard created by the Wireless Power Consortium.

The wireless charger cannot be used with a portable device that is larger than the charging area. Additionally, depending on the portable device, the wireless charger may not operate properly. Refer to the operation manual of the portable device.

The "Qi" logo

The "Qi" logo is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consortium.

Name for all parts

① Power supply switch
② Operation indicator light
③ Charging tray
④ Charging area*

*: Compatible portable devices and the wireless charger contain charging coils. The charging coil inside the wireless charger can move within the area around the center of the charging tray. When the charging coil inside a portable device is detected within the charging area, the charging coil in the wireless charger will move near the other coil and charging will begin. If the charging coil inside the portable device is moved out of the charging area, charging will be stopped automatically.

① ② ③ ④ q CTH64BT092

Additionally, if 2 or more portable devices are placed on the charging tray at the same time, each charging coil may not be detected correctly and charging may not be possible.

■Using the wireless charger

1 Press the power supply switch of the wireless charger.

Pressing the switch again turns the wireless charger off.

When turned on, the operation indicator light (green) comes on. When the power switch is turned off, the on/off state of the wireless charger will be memorized.

CTH64BT093

If the power supply switch is pressed 3 times while charging is being performed, the rapid charging function will turn on. To turn the wireless charger off, press the power supply switch when a portable device is not being charged.

2 Place a portable device on the charging tray.

Place the portable device so that it is centered in the charging area with its charging surface facing the portable charger. Depending on the portable device, its charging coil may not be in the center of the device. In this case, place the portable device so that its charging coil is centered in the charging area.

CTH64BT094

While charging, the operation indicator light (orange) will be illuminated. If charging does not begin, move the portable device as close to the center of the charging area as possible.

When charging is complete, the operation indicator light (green) will illuminate.

■ Recharging function

- If a certain amount of time has elapsed since charging completed and the portable device has not been moved, the wireless charger will restart charging.

- If a portable device is moved significantly within the charging area, the charging coil may disconnect and charging may temporarily be stopped. However, if a charging coil is detected within the charging area, the charging coil inside the wireless charger will move near the other coil and charging will resume.

■Rapid charging function

- Portable devices, such as the following, can be rapidly charged.

• Rapid charging capable devices which conform to WPC Ver 1.2.4.
• 7.5 W charging capable iPhones (iPhone 8 and later)

●To turn the rapid charging function on, press the power supply switch 3 times while charging is being performed. If rapid charging is possible, the operation indicator will change from illuminated (orange) to alternating between (green) and (orange).

- When charging is finished, the rapid charging function will turn off. To perform rapid charging again, turn the rapid charging function back on.

■Operation indicator light status

Operation indicator light State
Off The Wireless charger is off
Green (illuminated)	Standby (charging is possible)*1
	Charging is complete*2
Orange (illuminated)	A portable device has been placed on the charging area (identifying the portable device)
	Charging in progress
Illuminated between green and orange alternately	A portable device, such as the following, is being rapidly charged• Rapid charging capable device which conforms to WPC Ver 1.2.4.• 7.5 W charging capable iPhone (iPhone 8 and later)

*1: While in standby, charging power is not output. If a metal object is placed on the charging tray in this state, the object will not heat up.
*2: Depending on the portable device, the operation indicator light may stay illuminated (orange) after charging has completed.

●If the operation indicator light blinks

If an error is detected, the operation indicator light will blink (orange). Take the appropriate measures according to the table below.

Operation indicator light	Suspected causes Measure
Continuously blinks 1 time per second	Communication malfunction between the wireless charger and smart key system	If the hybrid system is operating, stop the hybrid system and then restart it.If the power switch is in ACCESSORY mode, start the hybrid system.(→P. 206)
Continuously flashes 3 times (orange)	Foreign matter detectedIf a metallic foreign object is detected in the charge area, the overheat prevention function of the charging coil will operate	Remove the foreign object from the charge area.
	Portable device not aligned correctlyIf the charging coil of a portable device is not properly positioned on the charging area, the overheat prevention function of the charging coil will operate	Remove the portable device from the charging tray, check that the operation indicator light changes back to green, and then place the portable device so that it is near the center of the charging tray.Also, if a case or cover is installed to the portable device, remove it.
Continuously flashes 4 times (orange)	Temperature inside wireless charger exceeded a certain amount	Stop charging, remove the portable device from the charging tray, and wait for the temperature to decrease before attempting to begin charging again.

■The wireless charger can be operated when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■Portable devices that can be charged

• Portable devices compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard can be charged by the wireless charger. However, compatibility with all devices which meet the Qi wireless charging standard is not guaranteed.
  ● The wireless charger is designed to supply low power electricity (5 W or less) to a cellular phone, smartphone, or other portable device.
  ● However, portable devices, such as the following, can be charged with more than 5 W.

- 7.5 W charging compatible iPhones can be charged at 7.5 W or less.

- Portable devices which conform to WPC Ver 1.2.4 can be charged at 10 W or less.

■ Using the smart key system

During charging, when the smart key system searches for an electronic key, charging may be temporarily suspended.

If a cover or accessory is attached to the portable device

Do not charge a portable device if a cover or accessory which is not Qi compatible is attached. Depending on the type of cover and/or accessory attached, it may not be possible to charge the portable device. If the portable device is placed on the charging area and does not charge, remove the cover and/or accessories.

If interference is heard in AM radio broadcasts while charging

• Turn off the wireless charger and check if the noise is reduced. If noise is reduced, press and hold the power supply switch of the wireless charger for 2 seconds. The frequency of the wireless charger is changed and noise may be reduced. When the frequency is changed, the operation indicator light will blink (orange) 2 times.
  ●Rapid charging for iPhones is performed using a specific radio wave frequency.

Depending on the version of iOS installed, while the frequency is being changed, rapid charging may not be performed.

■ Charging precautions

While charging, the wireless charger and the portable device will become warm. This is not a malfunction.

If a portable device becomes warm while charging and charging stops due to the protection function of the portable device, wait until the portable device cools down and charge it again.

Also, to decrease the temperature inside the wireless charger, a fan may operate. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Sound generated during operation

Operation sounds may be heard when the power supply switch is pressed to turn the wireless charger on, when the power switch is pressed to change to ACCESSORY or ON mode while the wireless charger is on, or when a portable device is being detected. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Situations in which the wireless charger may not operate correctly

In the following situations, the wireless charger may not operate correctly:

• When a portable device is fully charged
• When a portable device is being charged by a wired connection.
• When there is foreign matter between the charging area and portable device
• When the temperature of a portable device becomes high while charging
• When the temperature near the charging tray is 95^ (35°C) or more due to being in direct sunlight, etc.
• When a portable device is placed with its charging surface facing up

- When a portable device is not centered on the charging area

- When a portable device is larger than the charging tray

- When a foldable portable device is placed outside of the charging area

- When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, fuel station, radio station, large display, airport, or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

- When the any of the following objects, with a thickness of 0.08 in. (2 mm) or more, are between the charging surface of a portable device and the charging area:

• Thick cases or covers
• Thick decorations
• Accessories, such as finger rings, straps, etc.

- When the portable device is in contact with, or is covered by any of the following metallic objects:

• Cards covered with metal, such as aluminum foil
  • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
  • Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Heat packs
  • Recorded media such as CDs and DVDs
  • Metallic decorations
  • Metallic cases or covers

- When wireless keys (that emit radio waves) other than those of your vehicle are being used nearby

- When 2 or more portable devices are placed on the charging tray at the same time

In situations other than above, if the wireless charger does not operate properly or the operation indicator light blinks continuously, the wireless charger may be malfunctioning.

Contact your Toyota dealer.

■Cleaning the wireless charger

→P. 417

WARNING

■Caution while driving

When charging a portable device while driving, for safety reasons, the driver should not operate the portable device.

■Precautions for when driving

Do not charge small, lightweight portable devices, such as wireless earbuds, while driving. Lightweight devices may fly off of the charging tray, possibly leading to an accident.

■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators, as well as any other electrical medical device, should consult their physician about the usage of the wireless charger.

Operations of the wireless charger may have an affect on medical devices.

WARNING

■To prevent damage or burns

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in the possibility of fire, equipment failure or damage, or burns due to heat.

• Do not put any metallic objects between the charging area and the portable device while charging.
• Do not attach metallic objects, such as aluminum stickers, to the charging area.
• Do not charge portable devices with aluminum stickers or other metallic objects attached to the side which touches the charging area.
• Do not store items on the wireless charger instead of in an auxiliary box.
• Do not apply force or impact to the wireless charger.
• Do not disassemble, modify or remove the wireless charger.
• Do not attempt to charge portable devices which are not compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard.
  ●Do not allow magnetic objects to come near the wireless charger
  ●Do not perform charging if the charging area is dirty
• When not using the wireless charger, to prevent foreign matter or liquids from contacting it, make sure to close the lid.
• Do not cover the wireless charger with a cloth or other object while charging.

NOTICE

■To prevent failure or damage to data

• Do not place magnetic cards, such as a credit card, or magnetic recording media, close to the wireless charger while charging. Otherwise, data may be erased due to the influence of magnetism.
  Additionally, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches, close to the wireless charger, as such objects may malfunction.
• Do not perform charging with a contactless smart card, such as a credit card, between the charging surface of a portable device and the charging area. The IC chip in the card may become extremely hot, possibly damaging the portable device or smart card.
  Be extra careful to not charge a portable device with a case or cover which a contactless smart card can be inserted.
• Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the cabin may become high when parked in the sun, and cause damage to the device.

When the OS of a smartphone has been updated

When the OS version of a smartphone has been changed, the charging specifications may have changed. If the WPC compatibility version is changed, the rapid charging function may no longer be able to be used. For details, check for information on the website for the smartphone manufacturer.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the wireless charger for a long period of time with the hybrid system stopped.

Armrest

Fold down the armrest for use.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle seatbelt, with no text or symbols present

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the arm-rest.

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

Line drawing of a person sitting inside a car backseat, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat. Doing so may cause it to break, possibly leading to serious injury.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not put a heavy load on the assist grip.

Coat hooks

Coat hooks are provided on the rear assist grips.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a handle and seat, with no visible text or symbols

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

System components

The HomeLink ^® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device.

① HomeLink® indicator light
② Garage door operation indicators
③ Buttons

① ② ③ CTH64BT001

■Before programming the HomeLink®

●During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.
●It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.
●Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor.

■HomeLink ^® programming procedure

The programming procedures can also be found at the following URL.

Website: www.homelink.com/toyota

For support, contact customer support at the following.

Help Line: 1-800-355-3515

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

CTH64BT091

■Programming the HomeLink®

Steps through must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed.

1 Press and release the HomeLink ^® button you want to program and check that the HomeLink ^® indicator light flashes orange.
2 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons.

Keep the HomeLink ^® indicator light in view while programming.

Diagram of a car rearview mirror with control buttons and a 3D object (no text or symbols)

3 Program a device.

CTH64BT003

▶ Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)
Press and hold the remote control transmitter button until the HomeLink ^® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button.
▶ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink ^® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code).

4 Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light:

- Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

- Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then release it.

- If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to "Programming a rolling code system".

5 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■Programming a rolling code system

2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.

1 Locate the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor in the garage.

This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the Owner's manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details.

CTH64BT004

2 Press and release the "Learn" or "Smart" button.

Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2.

CTH64BT005

3 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the HomeLink® signal.

3 times to CTH64BT006

■Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.

2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)

1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink ^® , both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed.

2 Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage door.

3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

■Reprogramming a single HomeLink ^® button

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten:

1 With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
2 When the HomeLink ^® indicator starts flashing orange, continue to hold the HomeLink ^® button and perform “Programming the HomeLink ^® ” (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink ^® indicator to start flashing).

Operating the HomeLink®

Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light should turn on.

Garage door operation indicators

The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators.

① Opening
② Closing

This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)

CTH64BT007

Color	Status
Orange (flashing)	Currently opening/closing
Green	Opening/closing has completed
Red (flashing)	Feedback signals cannot be received

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received. To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either HomeLink®

buttons and or and simultane

ously. The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Erasing the entire HomeLink ^® memory (all three codes)

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from continuously lit orange to rapidly flashing green.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory.

CTH64BT011

■Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory

● The registered codes are not erased even if the 12-volt battery cable is disconnected.
- If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink ^ button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.

■Before programming

● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
●The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the Home-Link®.

WARNING

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLin® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

■When operating or programming HomeLink®

Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.

Maintenance and care

6

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...... 412

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior...... 416

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.... 419

General maintenance..... 422

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs.... 426

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions .... 427

Hood 429

Positioning a floor jack ..... 431

Engine compartment...... 432

12-volt battery 440

Tires 444

Tire inflation pressure ..... 458

Wheels 461

Air conditioning filter...... 463

Cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent and filter..... 465

Electronic key battery...... 470

Checking and replacing fuses 473

Light bulbs.... 476

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain prime condition:

●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■Automatic car washes

• Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
  ● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicle's paint.
  ● Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.

■High pressure car washes

As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the gaps around the doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray these areas continuously.

■When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P. 166)

Wheels and wheel ornaments

• Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
  ●Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
  ● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

■Brake pads and calipers

Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the parts.

Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows:

●Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neutral detergent and water to clean the dirt off.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
● To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product.

WARNING

■When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire.

■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, avoid using the system and consult your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.)

●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
- If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
- If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
- If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
- If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

- If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■Cleaning the exterior lights

- Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

- Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

NOTICE

■When using a high pressure car wash

• When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not spray water directly on the radar which is equipped behind the emblem. Otherwise it may cause the device to be damaged.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts

- Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicle body. Otherwise resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged. Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle in the same place.

- Do not spray the lower part of the windshield continuously. If water enters the air conditioning system intake located near the lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not operate correctly.

- Do not wash the underside of the vehicle using a high pressure car washer.

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
• If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
  Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents

• Remove dirt using a soft cloth or synthetic chamois dampened in a baking soda (sodium bicarbonate) solution.
  Use a solution of approximately 9% baking soda dissolved in water.

●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.

Cleaning the leather areas

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
  ● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
  Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
  ●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
  ●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
  ● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
  ●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

■Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

Water in the vehicle

• Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent, and in the trunk.
  Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
• Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 36)
  An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
  ● Vehicles with wireless charger:
  Do not let the wireless charger ( P. 392) get wet. Failure to do so may cause the charger to become hot and cause burns or could cause electric shock resulting in death or serious injury.

■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■Cleaning detergents

• Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Areas other than the seats and steering wheel: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
• Steering wheel: Organic substances, such as thinner, and cleaner that contains alcohol
• Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.

■Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

• Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
• Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
• Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. ( P. 247)

■Cleaning the inside of the rear window

- Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

- Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

■Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required

After the required maintenance is preformed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message.

To reset the message, perform the following procedure:

1 Select 4.2-inch display) or (7 inch display) on the multi-information display using the meter control switches on the steering wheel. (→P. 109, 126)
2 4.2-inch display: Select "Vehicle Settings" and then press . OK 7-inch display: Select 📋 and then press and hold . OK
3 Select "Scheduled Maintenance" and then press .
4 Select "Yes" and then press .
5 A message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the reset procedure has been completed.

- Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
- Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

WARNING

If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■ Important health and safety information

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
- Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P. 440)

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items Check points
Brake fluid	Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (→P. 438)
Coolant	Is the coolant at the correct level? (→P. 436)
Engine oil	Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P. 433)
Exhaust system	There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser	The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (→P. 437)
Washer fluid	Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P. 439)

Trunk

Items Check points
12-volt battery Check the connections.	(→P. 440)

Vehicle interior

Items Check points
Accelerator pedal	·The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Hybrid transmission “Park” mecha-nism	·When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal	·Does the brake pedal move smoothly? ·Does the brake pedal have appro-priate clearance from the floor? (→P. 549) ·Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play? (→P. 549)
Brakes	·The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied. ·The brakes should work effec-tively. ·The brake pedal should not feel spongy. ·The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.
Head restraints (adjustable type)	·Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers	·Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
Lights · Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake	·Does the parking brake operate normally? ·When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts	Do the seat belts operate smoothly?The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats	Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel	Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points
Doors/trunk	· Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?
Engine hood	· Does the engine hood lock system work properly?
Fluid leaks	· There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.
Tires	· Is the tire inflation pressure correct? · The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn. · Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule? · The wheel nuts should not be loose.
Windshield wipers	· The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation. · The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping.

WARNING

■If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

●When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools
12-volt battery condition(→P. 440)	• Grease• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level(→P. 438)	• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
Engine/power control unit coolant level(→P. 436)	• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technologyU.S.A.:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level(→P. 433)	• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (→P. 473)	• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent(→P. 465)	• Vacuum cleaner, etc.• Phillips screwdriver
Light bulbs(→P. 476)	• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original• Flathead screwdriver • Wrench
Radiator/condenser (→P. 437)	—
Tire inflation pressure(→P. 458)	• Tire pressure gauge• Compressed air source
Washer fluid(→P. 439)	• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■When working on the engine compartment

Make sure that the "READY" indicator is off.
- Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
- Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
- Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.
- Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.

■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the power switch is off.

With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. ( P. 437)

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly.

CTH73BT007

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

Diagram showing a car's engine compartment being adjusted for a car's steering wheel (no text or symbols present)

3 Hold the hood open by inserting the support rod into the slot.

CTH73BT269

■Open hood warning buzzer

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the hood is not fully closed.

WARNING

■Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

■After installing the support rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely preventing it from falling down onto your head or body.

NOTICE

When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod not clipped could cause the hood to bend.

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Diagram showing a car being adjusted for a lift, with an inset illustrating the mechanical shift (no text or symbols present)

Rear

Diagram showing car wheel assembly with a bracket and a close-up of the seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols)

Engine compartment

Technical diagram of a car engine with numbered components for identification

① Fuse boxes ( P. 473)
② Engine oil filler cap ( P. 434)
③ Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 433)
④ Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 438)
⑤ Radiator ( P. 437)

⑥ Electric cooling fan
⑦ Condenser ( P. 437)
⑧ Power control unit coolant reservoir ( P. 436)
⑨ Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 436)
⑩ Washer fluid tank ( P. 439)

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

CTH73BT160

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.

4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.

5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

① Low
② Normal
③ Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

CTH73BT240

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

■Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Technical diagram showing engine components and a circular component with a highlighted section (no text or symbols)

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection →	P. 547
Oil quantity (Low → Full)	1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

• When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine
  ● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
• When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
• When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

WARNING

■Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
- Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
- Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
- Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

If oil is spilled on the engine cover

To prevent the engine cover from being damaged, remove any engine oil from the engine cover as soon as possible using a neutral detergent. Do not use an organic solvent such as brake cleaner.

Coolant

▶ Engine coolant reservoir

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

① Reservoir cap
② “F” line
③ “L” line

If the level is on or below the "L" line, add coolant up to the "F" line. (→P. 537)

① ② F L ③ CTH73BT078

▶ Power control unit coolant reservoir

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

① Reservoir cap
② “FULL” line
③ “LOW” line

If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line. (→P. 537)

① ② FULL LOW ③ CTH73BT079

Coolant selection

Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada:

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])

For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps or the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Brake fluid

- Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank.

① “MAX”
② “MIN”

CTH73BT161

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Item Clean funnel

■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

WARNING

■When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

Washer fluid

Add washer fluid in the following situations:

●A washer does not work.
● "Windshield Washer Fluid Low" is displayed on the multi-information display.

Diagram of a car engine showing internal components and a water tap pouring liquid into a container (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

12-volt battery

Location

The 12-volt battery is located on the right-hand side of the trunk.

Technical line drawing of a car rear bumper with an inset showing a component detail (no text or symbols)

Removing the 12-volt battery cover

Remove the 12-volt battery cover.

Diagram of a car interior showing a curved ramp and directional arrows, no text or symbols present

Exterior

Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

① Terminals
② Hold-down clamp

① ① ② CTH73BT072

■Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:

• If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
  ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

■After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery

• Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
• Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt.
  ● The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power before disconnecting the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery:

• Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
  ●Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
  ●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
  ●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
  ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
• Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.

■Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

■How to recharge the 12-volt battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
- If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
- If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

■When disconnecting the 12-volt battery

Do not disconnect the negative (-) terminal on the body side. The disconnected negative (-) terminal may touch the positive (+) terminal, which may cause a short and result in death or serious injury.

■When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.

For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

① ② ③ CTY63ZA001

① New tread
② Worn tread
③ Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a "TWI" or "Δ" mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

graph LR
    A[" "] <--> B[" "]
    C[" "] <--> D[" "]
    E[" "] <--> F[" "]
    G[" "] <--> H[" "]
    I[" "] <--> J[" "]
    K[" "] <--> L[" "]
    M[" "] <--> N[" "]
    O[" "] <--> P[" "]
    Q[" "] <--> R[" "]
    S[" "] <--> T[" "]
    U[" "] <--> V[" "]
    W[" "] <--> X[" "]
    Y[" "] <--> Z[" "]
    AA[" "] <--> AB[" "]
    AC[" "] <--> AD[" "]
    AE[" "] <--> AF[" "]
    AG[" "] <--> AH[" "]
    AI[" "] <--> AJ[" "]
    AK[" "] <--> AL[" "]
    AM[" "] <--> AN[" "]
    AO[" "] <--> AP[" "]
    AQ[" "] <--> AR[" "]
    AS[" "] <--> AT[" "]
    AU[" "] <--> AV[" "]
    AW[" "] <--> AX[" "]
    AY[" "] <--> AZ[" "]

Tire pressure warning system

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valve and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.

▶ Vehicles without a tire inflation pressure display function

If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. (→P.501)

▶ Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function

● The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display.

▶ 4.2-inch display ▶ 7-inch display

35 35 35 35 CTH73BT066

35 psi 35 psi 35 psi 35 psi CTH73BT263

- If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. (→P. 501)

▶ 4.2-inch display ▶ 7-inch display

35 35 25 35 CTH73BT068

35 psi 35 psi 35 psi 25 psi CTH73BT264

◆Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing the tires or wheels, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed to the wheels which will be installed to the vehicle.

When new tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. ( P. 448)

◆Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

• When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.
• When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when the tire size is changed.
  ●When rotating the tires.
  ● Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function: After performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure. (→P. 448)
  When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and stop the hybrid system for 20 minutes or more.
The initialization procedure cannot be started while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. ( P. 550)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
3 Start the hybrid system. ( P. 206)
4 Select 4.2 -inch display) or (7-inch display) on the multi-information display using the meter control switches on the steering wheel. ( P. 109, 126).
5 4.2-inch display: Select "Vehicle Settings" and then press . OK 7-inch display: Select 📄 and then press and hold . OK
6 Select "TPWS" and then press . OK

7 Select "Set Pressure" then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function: “- -” will be displayed on the multi-information display for the inflation pressure of each tire while initialization is being performed.

CTH73BT254

8 Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function: Drive at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

When initialization is complete, the inflation pressure of each tire will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Even if the vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, initialization can be completed by driving for a long time. However, if initialization does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again.

◆ Registering ID codes

▶ Vehicles without a tire inflation pressure display function

Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code. In addition to the set of tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes initially registered to the vehicle, a second set of ID codes can be registered.

A second set of tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes can be registered at your Toyota dealer. When 2 sets of ID codes have been registered, either ID code set can be selected.

▶ Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function

Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID codes.

The ID codes can be registered on (4-2-inch display) or (7-inch display) of the multi-information display.

■Changing the available set of ID codes (vehicles without a tire inflation pressure display function)

When 2 sets of ID codes are registered, the corresponding ID code set for the installed wheels can be selected on (4.2-inch display) or (inch display) of the multi-information display. It is not necessary to reregister the ID codes each time the wheels are changed.

For information regarding changing the registered ID codes for an ID code set, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ How to register the ID codes (vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function)

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place, wait for approximately 20 minutes, and then start the hybrid system. (→P. 206)
2 Select 4.2 -inch display) or (7-inch display) on the multi-information display using the meter control switches on the steering wheel. ( P. 109, 126)
3 4.2-inch display: Select "Vehicle Settings" and then press . OK 7-inch display: Select and then press and hold . OK
4 Select "TPWS" and then press . OK

5 Select "Change Wheel" then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

When registration is being performed, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute then illuminate and “- -” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display.

CTH73BT254

6 Drive at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Registration is complete when the tire pressure warning light turns off and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multi-information display.

Even if the vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, registration can be completed by driving for a long time. However, if registration does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, perform the procedure again from the beginning.

7 Initialize the tire pressure warning system. (→P. 446)

- When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
- You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. In this case, after driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then illuminate to indicate a system malfunction.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■Low profile tires (vehicles with 18-inch wheels)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

■Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. ( P. 556)

Line drawing of a car door with a switch and lock, showing no text or symbols

Tire types

●Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

●All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

●Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 360)

If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

- In the following situations, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.
• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• If tire chains, etc. are installed.
• If a window tint that affects radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is much higher than the specified level.
• If wheels not equipped with tire pressure warning valve and transmitter are used.
• If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

●Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• When driving near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function: If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by changing the location of the vehicle as the radio wave conditions may change.

- When the vehicle is stopped, the time taken for the warning to start or turn off may be longer.

- When the inflation pressure of a tire drops rapidly, for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not operate.

■ Initialization procedure

● Make sure to perform the initialization procedure after adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before performing the initialization procedure or adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
- If the power switch is turned off during initialization, it is not necessary to restart the initialization procedure from the beginning as it will begin automatically when the power switch is turned back to ON mode.
- If initialization has accidentally been started when it is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold and then perform the initialization procedure again.
● Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function: While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on.

■Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

If the tire pressure warning system is not initialized properly

▶ Vehicles without a tire inflation pressure display function Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• If initialization is attempted and the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.

▶ Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function
- In the following situations, initialization may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete initialization.) If initialization is not complete after driving approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer to complete initialization.
• If the vehicle is backed up while performing initialization, data collected during initialization will be cleared and it will take longer than normal to complete.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles.

If initialization is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again.

- In the following situations, initialization will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the initialization procedure again.

• If, when attempting to start initialization, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.

- If initialization cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ When registering ID codes (vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function)

• Before performing ID code registration, make sure that no wheels with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters installed are near the vehicle.
  ● Make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system after registering the ID codes. If the system is initialized before registering the ID codes, the initialized values will be invalid.
• As the tires will be warm when registration is completed, make sure to allow the tires to cool before performing initialization.

■ Canceling ID code registration (vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function)

• To cancel ID code registration after it has been started, turn the power switch off before driving the vehicle.
  If the vehicle is driven after ID code registration is started, to cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and turn the power switch off before driving.
• If ID code registration has been canceled, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute when the power switch is turned to ON mode and then illuminate. The tire pressure warning system will be operational when the tire pressure warning light turns off.
• If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, ID code registration may not have been cancelled correctly. To cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and then turn the power switch off before driving.

If ID codes are not registered properly (vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function)

- In the following situations, ID code registration may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete ID code registration.)

If ID code registration is not complete after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer than normal to complete registration.
• If the vehicle is backed up while performing registration, data collected during registration will be cleared, and it will take longer than normal to complete.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles.
• If a wheel with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter installed is inside or near the vehicle, registration of the ID codes for the installed wheels may not be possible.

If ID registration is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then perform the ID code registration procedure again.

• In the following situations, ID code registration will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the ID code registration procedure again.
• If, when attempting to start ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.
• If ID code registration cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

• Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
  Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
• Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
• Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
• Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
• Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
  Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not initialize the tire pressure warning system without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valve and transmitters and tire valve caps

• When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
  ● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water may enter the valves of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters and the valves may become stuck.
• When replacing tire valve caps, do not replace them with metal caps or any tire valve caps other than specified, as they may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 446)

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-holes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.

■ Low profile tires (vehicles with 18-inch wheels)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:

• Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.
• Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. ( P. 550)

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY | TOTAL | FRONT | REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES | TOTAL, X | AVANT, X | ARRÉRE: X The combined weight of occupants andarge should never exceed XXXkg or XX00bs. Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne d'él jamais dépasser XXXkg ou XX00b. TIRE PRED SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS A FROID FRONT AVANT XXXX/XXXXX XXX kPa, XX PSI REAR ARRÈRE XXXX/XXXXX XXX kPa, XX PSI SPARE DE SEISM XXXX/XXXXX XXX kPa, XX PSI SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VOR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS XX XXX-XXX-XXX CTH73BT073

Inspection and adjustment procedure

① Tire valve
② Tire pressure gauge

① ② CTH73BT010

1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back on.

■Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

●Reduced fuel economy
●Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
●Reduced tire life due to wear
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drivetrain

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

• Check only when the tires are cold.
  If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
  ●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
  It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
• It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
  ●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
  Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

Excessive wear
Uneven wear
●Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Air leaking from between tire and wheel
●Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges on the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as "offset".

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)

●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
- When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
- Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
- Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

■When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed. ( P. 446)

WARNING

■When replacing wheels

• Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
  ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■When installing the wheel nuts

- Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 521) Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

or

NOTICE

■Replacing tire pressure warning valve and transmitters

Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valve and transmitters at your Toyota dealer.
- Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valve and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the glove box and remove the glove box cover inside the glove box.

3 Remove the filter cover.

① Unlock the filter cover.
② Move the filter cove direction of the arrow, and then pull it out of the claws.

4 Remove the filter case.

There may be foreign objects on top of the air conditioning filter.

Diagram of a vehicle door handle with a highlighted internal component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

in the UP ② ① CTH73BT012

UP CTH73BT013

5 Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.

The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.

CTH73BT251 ↑UP

- Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

■Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function

When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become significantly weakened in a short period.

When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning filter.

NOTICE

■When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

■To prevent damage to the filter cover

When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release the fitting, pay attention not to apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged.

CTH73BT015

Cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent and filter

To prevent the fuel economy from being affected, visually inspect the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent periodically for dust and clogs. If it is dusty or clogged or if “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display, clean the air intake vent using the following procedures:

Cleaning the air intake vent

Remove the dust from the air intake vent with a vacuum cleaner, etc.

Make sure to only use a vacuum to suck out dust and clogs. Attempting to blow out dust and clogs using an airgun, etc. may push it into the air intake vent. (→P. 469)

Line drawing of a car interior showing a hand inserting a component into the seat area (no text or symbols)

If dust and clogs cannot be completely removed

If dust and clogs cannot be completely removed with the air intake vent cover installed, remove the cover and clean the filter.

1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the clip.

① ② CTH73BT093

3 Remove the air intake vent cover.

① Pull the cover as shown in the illustration to disengage the 7 claws, starting from the claw in the upper right corner.
② Pull the cover toward the front of the vehicle to remove it.

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted vehicle seat area and directional arrow indicating movement or flow.

② CTH73BT164

4 Remove the air intake vent filter.

① Disengage the 3 claws as shown in the illustration.
② Remove the filter from the cover.

① ② CTH73BT095

5 Remove the dust and clogs from the filter using a vacuum cleaner, etc.

Make sure to also remove the dust and clogs from the inside of the air intake vent cover.

Line drawing of two hands holding a mobile phone with a gridded screen (no text or symbols visible)

6 Reinstall the filter to the cover.

① Engage the filter to the 2 claws as shown in the illustration.
② Engage the 3 claws to install the filter.

Make sure that the filter is not crooked or deformed when installing it.

Diagram illustrating the process of heat transfer in a motor or fan blade, showing two stages with arrows indicating flow direction.

7 Install the air intake vent cover.

① Insert the tab of the cover as shown in the illustration.
② Push the cover to engage the 7 claws.

① ② CTH73BT165

8 Using a Phillips screwdriver, install the clip.

① ② CTH73BT099

■Scheduled maintenance of the air intake vent is necessary when

In some situations such as when the vehicle is used frequently or in heavy traffic or dusty areas, the air intake vent may need to be cleaned more regularly. For details, refer to “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■Cleaning the air intake vent

• Dust in the air intake vent may interfere with the cooling of the hybrid battery (traction battery). If charging/discharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes limited, the distance that the vehicle can be driven using the electric motor (traction motor) may be reduced and the fuel economy may be reduced.
  Inspect and clean the air intake vent periodically.

- Improper handling of the air intake vent cover and filter may result in damage to them. If you have any concerns about cleaning the filter, contact your Toyota dealer.

If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display

- If this warning message is displayed on the multi-information display, remove the air intake vent cover and clean the filter. (→P. 465)

● After cleaning the air intake vent, start the hybrid system and check that the warning message is no longer displayed.

After the hybrid system is started, it may be necessary to drive the vehicle up to approximately 20 minutes before the warning message disappears. If the warning message does not disappear after driving for appropriately 20 minutes, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■When cleaning the air intake vent

• Do not use water or other liquids to clean the air intake vent. If water is applied to the hybrid battery (traction battery) or other components, a malfunction or fire may occur.
  Before cleaning the air intake vent, make sure to turn the power switch off to stop the hybrid system.

■When removing the air intake vent cover

Do not touch the service plug located near the air intake vent. ( P. 85)

NOTICE

■When cleaning the air intake vent

When cleaning the air intake vent, make sure to only use a vacuum to suck out dust and clogs. If a compressed air blow gun, etc. is used to blow out dust and clogs, the dust or clogs may be pushed into the air intake vent, which may affect the performance of the hybrid battery (traction battery) and cause a malfunction.

CTH73BT174

■To prevent damage to the vehicle

• Do not allow water or foreign matter to enter the air intake vent when the cover is removed.
• Carefully handle the removed filter so that it will not be damaged. If the filter is damaged, have it replaced with a new filter by your Toyota dealer.
  ● Make sure to reinstall the filter and cover to their original positions after cleaning.
• Do not install anything to the air intake vent other than the exclusive filter for this vehicle or use the vehicle without the filter installed.

If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display

If the vehicle is continuously driven with the warning message (indicating that charging/discharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery) may become limited) displayed, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may malfunction. If a warning message is displayed, clean the air intake vent immediately.

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

●Flathead screwdriver
●Small flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2032

Replacing the battery

1 Release the lock and remove the mechanical key.

CTH73BT004

2 Remove the key cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screw-driver with a rag.

CTH73BT005

3 Remove the depleted battery using a small flathead screw-driver.

When removing the cover, the electronic key module may stick to the cover and the battery may not be visible. In this case, remove the electronic key module in order to remove the battery.

Diagram showing a screwdriver inserted into a device casing with a pink downward arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

4 When installing the key cover and mechanical key, install by conducting and with the directions reversed.
5 Operate the switch and check that the doors can be locked/unlocked.

■When replacing the key battery

Be careful not to lose the battery or any other small parts.

■Use a CR2032 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
- Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
●The operational range will be reduced.

WARNING

Battery precautions

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Do not swallow the battery. Doing so may cause chemical burns.
● A coin battery or button battery is used in the electronic key. If a battery is swallowed, it may cause severe chemical burns in as little as 2 hours and may result in death or serious injury.
- Keep away new and removed batteries from children.
- If the cover cannot be firmly closed, stop using the electronic key and stow the key in the place where children cannot reach, and then contact your Toyota dealer.
- If you accidentally swallow a battery or put a battery into a part of your body, get emergency medical attention immediately.

■ To prevent battery explosion or leakage of flammable liquid or gas

• Replace the battery with a new battery of the same type. If a wrong type of battery is used, it may explode.
• Do not expose batteries to extremely low pressure due to high altitude or extremely high temperatures.
• Do not burn, break or cut a battery.

NOTICE

For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
- Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
- Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.

▶ Engine compartment (type A)

Technical diagram showing two mechanical components with arrows pointing to them, no readable text or symbols present.

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

▶ Engine compartment (type B)

Diagram of a car interior showing engine compartment and dashboard with two zoomed-in views (no text or symbols)

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Under the driver's side instrument panel

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing a close-up of the dashboard with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

Remove the lid.

Make sure to push the claw when removing/installing the lid.

3 Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.

Only type A fuses can be removed using the pullout tool.

CTH73BT163

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

▶ Type A ▶ Type B

Two identical mechanical component diagrams labeled ① and ②, showing internal channels (no text or symbols on the components themselves)

Two technical line drawings of a plastic container with internal components, labeled ① and ② (no text or symbols on the diagrams themselves)

▶ Type C

Two identical wireframe diagrams of battery compartments, labeled ① and ②, with no text or symbols on the compartments themselves.

① Normal fuse
② Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

■After a fuse is replaced

• If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P. 476)
• If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
- Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. ( P. 552)

Bulb locations

▶ Front ▶ Rear

① ② CTH73BT260

① ② ③ CTH73BT038

① Front turn signal/parking lights (bulb type)
② Front side marker lights (bulb type)

① Back-up lights (bulb type)
② Rear turn signal lights (bulb type)
③ Rear side marker lights (bulb type)

Replacing light bulbs

■Front turn signal/parking lights (bulb type)

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Diagram of a car wheel assembly showing internal components and a magnified view of the wheel (no text or labels)

2 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram of a plug connector with a pink arrow indicating insertion or transformation (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

3 Install a new light bulb and then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning it clockwise.

Two diagrams showing a plug connector with a pink arrow indicating rotation, and its internal wiring diagram with arrows (no text or symbols)

■Front side marker lights (bulb type)

1 To ensure enough space to perform work, turn the steering wheel to move the front wheel away from the light bulb to be replaced.

Turn the steering wheel to the left when replacing the right side light bulb, and turn the steering wheel to the right when replacing the left side light bulb.

Technical line drawing of a car's side profile showing front and rear views (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the fender liner clips.

CTH73BT042

3 To protect the front bumper from being damaged, apply protective tape around the clip as shown in the illustration.

Use masking tape, etc. Do not use duct tape, as it may leave residue or damage the paint when removed.

Diagram showing a car's side profile and rear door panel, with an arrow pointing to the door panel (no text or symbols present)

4 Insert a small flathead screw-driver between the front bumper and fender liner at the position marked with a “∇” and then separate the front bumper from the fender liner.

To separate the front bumper from the fender liner, pry up the fender liner while pulling the front bumper outward as shown in the illustration.

CTH73BT115

5 Pull back the fender liner and turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

CTH73BT044

6 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram of a plug with a connector, showing an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

7 Install a new light bulb and then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning it clockwise.

CTH73BT116

8 Return the fender liner to its original position, and install the clips.

Make sure that the fender liner is correctly positioned on the inner side of the front bumper.

CTH73BT117

9 To Install the fender liner to the front bumper, engage the clip to the front bumper.

CTH73BT118

10 Remove the protective tape.

■Back-up lights (bulb type)

1 Open the trunk lid and remove the clips.

CTH73BT120

2 Partly remove the trunk lid cover.

CTH73BT121

3 Disconnect the connector while depressing the lock release. (When replacing right side bulb only.)

CTH73BT122

4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

CTH73BT123

5 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram showing a light bulb being inserted into a mechanical component, with an arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

6 Install a new light bulb and then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning it clockwise.

CTH73BT126

7 Connect the connector. (When replacing right side bulb only.)

CTH73BT128

8 Reinstall the trunk lid cover with the clips.

CTH73BT130

■Rear turn signal lights (bulb type) and rear side marker lights (bulb type)

1 Open the trunk and apply protective tape to the vehicle body around the light unit.

Use masking tape, etc. Do not use duct tape, as it may leave residue or damage the paint when removed.

Diagram of a car's rearview handle and cable assembly (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the cover.

① Insert a flathead screw-driver between the cover and the light unit and pry up the cover in several positions as shown in the illustration to disengage the claws (indicated by a dotted line).
② Pull the cover toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the claws (indicated by a dotted line) and remove the cover.

To prevent scratching the vehicle, wrap the tip of the flathead screwdriver with a cloth, etc.

Diagram illustrating a mechanical device with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or force direction.

② CTH73BT132

3 Remove the 2 bolts.

Diagram showing a mechanical assembly with two parts inserted into a housing, no text or symbols present

4 Remove the light unit.

① Attach a long packing tape to the light unit and fold the excess in half.
② Hold the folded portion and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle to remove the light unit.

① piece of ② CTH73BT133

5 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

▶ Rear turn signal lights

▶ Rear side marker lights

Diagram showing a mechanical assembly with an inset view of a motor or gear mechanism (no text or symbols present)

Diagram showing a car interior with engine compartment and cable connector, plus a magnified inset highlighting a cable plug (no text or symbols)

6 Remove the light bulb.

▶ Rear turn signal lights

▶ Rear side marker lights

Diagram showing a plug being inserted into a terminal socket (no text or symbols present)

Diagram of a cable connector with a pink arrow indicating insertion or disassembly (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

7 Install a new light bulb and then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning it clockwise.

▶ Rear turn signal lights

▶ Rear side marker lights

CTH73BT134

Diagram showing a mechanical component being adjusted to a cable or connector, with no visible text or symbols.

8 Install the light unit.

Align the tabs and push the light unit toward the front of the vehicle to install it.

CTH73BT061

9 Install the 2 bolts.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a connector with arrows indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)

10 Install the cover.

Diagram of a car wheel handle with a highlighted section and arrow, no text or symbols present

11 Remove the protective tape.

■Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

●Headlights
●Daytime running lights
●Parking lights (LED type)
●Front turn signal lights (LED type)
●Front side marker lights (LED type)
●Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
●Tail lights
●Rear side marker lights (LED type)
●Stoplights
●Rear turn signal lights (LED type)
●Back-up lights (LED type)
●High mounted stoplight
●License plate lights

■LED light bulbs

The lights other than the front turn signal/parking lights (bulb type), front side marker lights (bulb type), back-up lights (bulb type), rear turn signal lights (bulb type) and rear side marker lights (bulb type) consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:

●Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.

WARNING

■Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

- Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.

Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

When trouble arises

7

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ..... 490

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .... 491

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising 492

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed .... 493

If you think something is wrong 496

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds .... 497

If a warning message is displayed .... 507

If you have a flat tire...... 513

If the hybrid system will not start.... 525

If the electronic key does not operate properly.... 527

If the 12-volt battery is discharged.... 530

If your vehicle overheats .... 537

If the vehicle becomes stuck .... 541

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped on the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again.

CTH81BT006

Emergency flashers

• If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge.
• If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the emergency flashers will turn on automatically.

The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn the emergency flashers off, press the switch twice.

(The emergency flashers may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.)

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.

▶ If the shift lever is shifted to N

3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4 Stop the hybrid system.
▶ If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
4 To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the power switch for 2 conseconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.
utive se

C POWER →

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more

CTH71AP006

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

WARNING

If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising

This vehicle is not designed to be able to drive on roads that are deeply flooded with water. Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. It is dangerous to remain in the vehicle, if it anticipated that the vehicle will be flooded or set a drift. Remain calm and follow the following.

• If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle.
• If the door can not be opened, open the window using the power window switch and ensure an escape route.
• If the window can be opened, exit the vehicle through the window.
• If the door and window cannot be opened due to the rising water, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehicle and then open the door after waiting for the rising water to enter the vehicle, and exit the vehicle. When the outside water level exceeds half the height of the door, the door cannot be opened from the inside due to water pressure.

Water level exceeds the floor

When the water level exceeds the floor and time has passed, the electrical equipment will get damaged, the power windows will not operate, the engine and motor stop, and the vehicle may not be able to get moving.

■Using an emergency escape hammer\*

Laminated glass is used in the windshield on this vehicle. Laminated glass cannot be shattered with an emergency hammer*. Tempered glass is used in the windows on this vehicle.

*: Contact your Toyota dealer or aftermarket accessory manufacturer for further information about an emergency hammer.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and cannot move, as well as become flooded and set a drift, which may lead to death.

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions. (→P. 493, 495)

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction.

CTH82BT010

■While towing

• When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.
• Do not turn the power switch off. There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the power switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
• When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
■ Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.) →P. 205

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

●The hybrid system warning message is shown on the multi-information display and the vehicle does not move.
●The hybrid system warning light turns on and the vehicle does not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

▶ From the front ▶ From the rear

Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car on a road, no text or symbols present

Release the parking brake.

Turn automatic mode off. ( P.223)

Silhouette illustration of a truck and car on a road, with no text or symbols present.

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE

■Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

CTH82BT283

Using a flatbed truck

When using a flat-bed truck to transport the vehicle, use tire strapping belts. Refer to the owner's manual of the flat-bed truck for the tire strapping method.

In order to suppress vehicle movement during transportation, set the parking brake and turn the power switch off.

Emergency towing

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

●Fluid leaks under the vehicle. (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

Audible symptoms

●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

Operational symptoms

●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light	Warning light/Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)(Red)(Canada)	Brake system warning lightIndicates that:The brake fluid level is low; orThe brake system is malfunctioning→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
(Yellow)	Brake system warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The regenerative braking system;The electronically controlled brake system; orThe electric parking brake→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(U.S.A.)(Canada)	Malfunction indicator lampIndicates a malfunction in:The hybrid system;The electronic engine control system; orThe electronic throttle control system→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
	SRS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The SRS airbag system;The front passenger occupant classification system; orThe seat belt pretensioner system→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(U.S.A.)(Canada)	ABS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The ABS; orThe brake assist system→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
	Inappropriate pedal operation warning light (warning buzzer)*1When a buzzer sounds:Indicates a malfunction in:The Brake Override SystemThe Drive-Start ControlParking Support Brake (if equipped)→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.Indicates that the shift position was changed and Drive-Start Control was operated while depressing the accelerator pedal.Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.When a buzzer does not sound:Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals are being depressed simultaneously, and the Brake Override System is operating.Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.
(Flashes)(U.S.A.)(Flashes)(Canada)	Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)*2It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or releasedOperate the parking brake once again.This light comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.
(Flashes)	Brake hold operated indicatorIndicates a malfunction in the brake hold system→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(Red/yellow)	Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(Yellow)	LTA indicator (warning buzzer)*1Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P. 281)
(Flashes or illuminates)	PCS warning lightWhen a buzzer sounds simultaneously:Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily unavailable, corrective action may be necessary.→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P. 250, 507)If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu-minate.→ P. 266
(If equipped)(Illuminates)	PKSB OFF indicatorWhen a buzzer sounds:Indicates a malfunction in the Parking Support Brake sys-tem→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possi-bly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.→ Clear the dirt, etc.
(If equipped)(Illuminates)	Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator*1Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist func-tion→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possi-bly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.→ Clear the dirt, etc.
(If equipped)(Flashes)	RCD OFF indicator*1When a buzzer sounds:Indicates a malfunction in the RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:Indicates that the function temporarily cannot be used due to the camera being dirty, etc.→Clear the dirt, etc.
	Slip indicatorIndicates a malfunction in:The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;The TRAC (Traction Control) systemThe ABS; orThe hill-start assist control systemThe light will flash when the ABS, VSC or TRAC system is operating.→Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
	Low fuel level warning lightIndicates that remaining fuel is approximately 1.8 gal. (6.7 L, 1.5 Imp. gal.) or less→Refuel the vehicle.
	Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*3Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts→Fasten the seat belt.If the front passenger's seat is occupied, the front passenger's seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
	Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)*4Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts.→Fasten the seat belt.
	Master warning lightA buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.→P. 507Tire pressure warning lightIndicates the following:Low tire pressure due to flat tire;Low tire pressure due to natural causes; orThe tire pressure warning system is malfunctioning→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method (→P. 503)

*1: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*2: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more.

*3: Driver's seat belt warning buzzer:

The driver's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

Front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer:

The front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

*4: Rear passengers' seat belt warning buzzer:

The rear passengers' seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time, after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

■SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), "AIRBAG ON" indicator light, "AIRBAG OFF" indicator light, seat belt pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P. 36)

■Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

• If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
• If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

●Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.

If a tire is punctured: →P. 513

If none of the tires are punctured:

Turn the power switch off then turn it to ON mode. Check if the tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks.

▶ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

1 After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level.
2 If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform initialization. ( P. 446)

If the warning light does not turn off several minutes after the initialization has been performed, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

▶ If the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on

There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly

→P. 452

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

WARNING

If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted. When the light comes on red, the assist to the power steering is lost and handling operations of the steering wheel become extremely heavy.

If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
  ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

WARNING

■Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.

4.2-inch display 7-inch display

① ② ③ CTH82BT011

① ② ③ CTH82BT012

① Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

② Multi-information display

③ Handling method

Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display. If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

Messages and warnings

The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

	System warning light	Warning buzzer*	Warning
Comeson	— Sounds		Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed
—	Comeson or flashes	Sounds	Indicates an important situation, such as when the systems shown on the multi-information display may be malfunctioning
Flashes	— Sounds		Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the vehicle or danger may result
Comeson	—	Does not sound	Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components, their condition, or indicates the need for maintenance
Flashes	— Does not sound		Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly

The operation of the warning lights and warning buzzers may differ from those stated. In this case, perform the correction procedure according to the displayed message.

*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.

Warning messages

The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifications.

■System warning lights

The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following cases. Instead, a separate system warning light will come on along with a message shown on the multi-information display.

●Malfunction in the ABS
The ABS warning light comes on. (→P. 498)
●Malfunction in the brake system
The brake system warning light (yellow) comes on. (→P. 497)
●Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning light comes on. (→P. 501)
●Remaining fuel level is low
The low fuel level warning light comes on. (→P. 500)

If a message instructing to refer to the Owner's Manual is displayed

- If the following messages are shown, there may be a malfunction. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

• "Low Braking Power Stop in a Safe Place See Owner's Manual"
• "Oil Pressure Low Stop in a Safe Place See Owner's Manual"
• "Charging System Malfunction Stop in a Safe Place See Owner's Manual"

- If the following message is shown, there may be a malfunction. Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• "Hybrid System Malfunction"
- "Check Engine"
- "Hybrid Battery System Malfunction"
• "Accelerator System Malfunction"
- "Smart Key System Malfunction See Owner's Manual"

- If “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is displayed, follow the instructions accordingly. (→P. 537)

- If "Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner's Manual" is displayed, follow the instructions accordingly. (→P. 510)

If "Hybrid System Overheated Output Power Reduced" is shown

This message may be displayed when driving under severe operating conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill.)

Handling method: →P. 537

If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is shown

The filter may be clogged, the air intake vent may be blocked or there may be a gap in the duct.

• If the air intake vent or filter is dirty, refer to P. 465 for cleaning the air intake vent and filter.
• If the message is being displayed and the air intake vent and filter are not dirty, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

If “Traction Battery Needs to Be Protected. Refrain from the Use of N Position.” is shown

This message may be displayed when the shift lever is in N.

As the hybrid battery (traction battery) cannot be charged when the shift lever is in N, shift the shift lever to P when the vehicle is stopped.

If “Traction Battery Needs to Be Protected. Shift into P to Restart.” is shown

This message is displayed when the hybrid battery (traction battery) charge has become extremely low because the shift lever has been left in N for a certain amount of time.

When operating the vehicle, shift to P and restart the hybrid system.

If "Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle" is shown

Message is displayed when the driver's door is opened without turning the power switch off with the shift lever in any position other than P. Shift the shift lever to P.

If "Shift Is in N Release Accelerator Before Shifting" is shown

Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal has been depressed and the shift lever is in N. Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift lever to D or R.

If "Press Brake When Vehicle Is Stopped Hybrid System May Overheat" is shown

Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal is depressed to maintain the vehicle position when stopped on a upward slope, etc. If this continues, the hybrid system may overheat.

Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

If "Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery" is displayed

This message is displayed when the power was cut off due to the automatic power off function.

The next time the hybrid system is started, keep the hybrid system operating for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery.

If “A New Key has been Registered Contact Your Dealer for Details” is displayed

This message will be displayed each time the driver's door is opened when the doors are unlocked from the outside for approximately one week after a new electronic key has been registered.

If this message is displayed but you have not had a new electronic key registered, ask your Toyota dealer to check if an unknown electronic key (other than those in your possession) has been registered.

If "Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is displayed

The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

●The LED headlight system
●The automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
●AHB (Automatic High Beam)
●AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)

If "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable See Owner's Manual" is shown

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range system is suspended temporarily or until the problem shown in the message is resolved. (causes and coping methods: →P. 250)

If "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable" is shown

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range system cannot be used temporarily. Use the system when it becomes available again.

If a message that indicates the malfunction of front camera is displayed

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved. ( P. 250, 497)

●PCS (Pre-Collision System)
●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
●AHB (Automatic High Beam)
●RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
●Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

If a message that indicates the malfunction of radar sensor is displayed

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved. ( P. 250, 497)

●PCS (Pre-Collision System)
●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
●Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

If "Maintenance Required Soon" is displayed

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule* should be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset.

If necessary, perform maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. ( P. 420)

*: Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

If "Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer" is displayed

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule*.

Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset.

(The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.)

Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. ( P. 420)

*: Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

If "Engine Oil Level Low Add or Replace" is displayed

The engine oil level may be low. Check the level of the engine oil, and add engine oil if necessary. This message may be displayed if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check if the message disappears.

Warning buzzer

→P. 503

NOTICE

If “High Power Consumption Power to Climate Temporarily Limited” is frequently shown

There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the 12-volt battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If “Maintenance Required For Traction Battery At Your Dealer” is shown (AXVH70 model\*)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) is scheduled to be inspected or replaced. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

● Continuing to drive the vehicle without having the hybrid battery (traction battery) inspected will cause the hybrid system not to start.

- If the hybrid system does not start, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 545)

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires: →P. 444

WARNING

If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
• Set the parking brake.
  ●Shift the shift lever to P.
• Stop the hybrid system.
  ● Turn on the emergency flashers. ( P. 490)

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ CTH82BT301

① Luggage floor cover
② Wheel nut wrench
③ Jack

④ Spare tire
⑤ Jack handle
⑥ Wheel lock key (if equipped)

WARNING

■Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

• Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.
• Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire replacing tires on this vehicle.

●Put the jack properly in its jack point.
- Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
- Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
- Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
- When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
- Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
- Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
- When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the vehicle when using a jack

When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, make sure not to position the jack under the bracket shown in the illustration near the rear jack point, as the vehicle body may be damaged.

CTH82BT109

Wheel lock nut (if equipped)

When replacing tires on a vehicle with wheel lock nuts, use the following procedures to remove and install the wheel lock nuts. The wheel lock key is stored in the tray inside the luggage compartment. Always return the wheel lock key to its original position after use, so that it does not get lost. (→P. 513)

Removal

For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first one loosened.

1 Place the wheel lock key on top of the wheel lock nut, turning until the wheel lock key and wheel lock nut patterns engage.
2 Place the wheel nut wrench on the wheel lock key, and while applying pressure on the wheel lock key, loosen the wheel lock nut.

Installation

For ease of installation, the wheel lock nut should always be the last one tightened.

1 By hand, install a wheel lock nut on the wheel to be installed.
2 Place the wheel lock key on top of the wheel lock nut, turning until the wheel lock key and wheel lock nut patterns engage.
3 Place the wheel nut wrench on the wheel lock key, and while applying pressure on the wheel lock key, tighten the wheel lock nut to the recommended torque.

NOTICE

■When using a wheel lock key

Do not use an impact wrench. Using an impact wrench may cause permanent damage to wheel lock nut and wheel lock key. If in doubt about wheel lock application, contact your Toyota dealer.

Taking out the jack

1 Lift up the hook of the luggage floor cover on the trunk floor.

CTH82BT135

2 Secure the luggage floor cover using the hook provided.

CTH82BT136

3 Remove the jack.

Top-down technical diagram of a car engine bay with internal components and a red arrow indicating a specific component (no text or symbols present)

Taking out the spare tire

1 Lift up the hook of the luggage floor cover on the trunk floor.

CTH82BT135

2 Secure the luggage floor cover using the hook provided.

CTH82BT136

3 Remove the tool tray.

Top-down view of a car's internal components, showing a motor or fan assembly with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

4 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

When taking out or stowing the spare tire, make sure to firmly hold opposite end of the tire.

CTH82BT021

WARNING

■When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

Replacing a flat tire

1 Chock the tires.

Line drawing of a car showing engine exhaust and wheel rim (no text or symbols)

Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front	Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
	Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear	Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
	Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 For vehicles with steel wheels, remove the wheel ornament using the wrench.

To protect the wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench and the wheel ornament, as shown in the illustration.

CTH82BT156

3 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

Vehicles with wheel locks: Use the wheel lock key to loosen the wheel lock.

Diagram of a car wheel with a tool inserted, showing mechanical components and a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

4 Turn the tire jack portion "A" by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

To prevent damage to the vehicle when using the jack, position the jack in the correct location.

(→P. 514)

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

5 Assemble the jack handle.

CTH82BT025

CTH82BT026

6 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car suspension system with a lever and crank (no text or symbols)

7 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

Illustration of hands holding a circular tire with a central hub, no text or symbols present

WARNING

■Replacing a flat tire

- Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward.

Installing the spare tire

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

Diagram showing hands cleaning a car tire and disc with a cloth (no text or symbols)

2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

When replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion Disc wheel seat CTH82BT031

When replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion Disc wheel seat CTH82BT032

3 Lower the vehicle.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car suspension system with a lever and wheel (no text or symbols)

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Vehicles with wheel locks: Tighten the wheel lock using the wheel lock key after tightening the other wheel nuts.

Tightening torque: 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

CTH82BT034

5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

■The compact spare tire

●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (→P. 550)

■When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■When the compact spare tire is equipped

When driving with the compact spare tire installed, the vehicle height will be different than when driving with standard tires.

If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with 16 or 17-inch wheels)

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.

Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

WARNING

■When using the compact spare tire

• Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
• Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.
• Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
• Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist
  • VSC
  • TRAC
  • EPS
  • AHB (Automatic High Beam)
• AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)*
  • Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
  • LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
  • PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• Tire pressure warning system
  • BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) *
• Intuitive parking assist*
• PKSB (Parking Support Brake) ^*
• Rear view monitor system*
  • Toyota parking assist monitor*
• Panoramic view monitor*
• Navigation system*

*: If equipped

■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

- Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 446)

If the hybrid system will not start

Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (→P. 206)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (→P. 528)
- There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle.
● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P. 89)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (→P. 526)
●AXVH70 model * only: The temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) may be extremely low (below approximately -22°F [-30°C]). (→P. 84, 209)
*:The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 545)

The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 530)
● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. (→P. 440)

The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 530)
● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. (→P. 440)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function

When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning normally.

Do not use this starting procedure except in case of emergency.

1 Set the parking brake.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.
4 Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If the electronic key does not operate properly

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( P. 167) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions

Doors

Using the mechanical key ( P. 151) in order to perform the following operations (driver's door only):

① Locks all doors
② Closes the windows and the moon roof ^1 ( t u r hold) ^2
③ Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.

④ Opens the windows and the moon roof ^1 (turn and hold) ^2

*1: If equipped
*2: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

① ③ ④ ② n a n d CTH82BT013

Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.

CTH82BT014

Starting the hybrid system

1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and firmly depress the brake pedal.

2 Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the power switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the power switch will turn to ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting, the power switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Line drawing of a hand holding a car gear inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is displayed on the multi-information display.
4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly.

In the event that the power switch still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.

■Stopping the hybrid system

Shift the shift lever to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.

■Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P. 470)

■Alarm (for Canada only)

Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system. If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm may be triggered.

■Changing power switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step above.

The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. ( P. 208)

When the electronic key does not work properly

● Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: →P. 569)
- Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P. 166)

WARNING

When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof

Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.

If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the vehicle's 12-volt battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

1 Confirm that the electronic key is being carried.

When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked. (→P. 92)

2 Open the hood and remove the fuse box cover.

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

CTH82BT054

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with arrows indicating assembly or movement (no text or symbols present)

3 Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover.

CTH82BT130

4 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

Diagram of car engine wiring and battery connections with labeled components and wiring details

① Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump starting terminal on your vehicle.
② Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
③ Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
④ Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

5 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
6 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off.
7 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the power switch to ON mode, then start the vehicle's engine.
8 Make sure the "READY" indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.
9 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
10 Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse box cover to its original position.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged

● Information stored in the ECU is cleared. When the 12-volt battery is depleted, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.
Some systems may require initialization. (→P. 577)

■When removing the 12-volt battery terminals

When the 12-volt battery terminals are removed, the information stored in the ECU is cleared. Before removing the 12-volt battery terminals, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)

■When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery

In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off.

If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

■When replacing the 12-volt battery

● Use a Central Degassing type 12-volt battery (European Regulations).
● Vehicles without a moon roof: Use a 12-volt battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN2), 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent (55Ah) or greater, and performance rating (CCA) is equivalent (345A) or greater.

Vehicles with a moon roof: Use a 12-volt battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN2), 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent (60Ah) or greater, and performance rating (CCA) is equivalent (563A) or greater.

• If the sizes differ, the 12-volt battery cannot be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not used is a short time, the 12-volt battery may discharge and the hybrid system may not be able to start.

- Use a 12-volt battery with a handle. If a 12-volt battery without a handle is used, removal is more difficult.

● After replacing, firmly attach the following items to the exhaust hole of the 12-volt battery.

• Use the exhaust hose that was attached to the 12-volt battery before replacing and confirm that it is firmly connected to the hole section of the vehicle.
• Use the exhaust hole plug included with the 12-volt battery replaced or the one installed on the battery prior to the replacement. (Depending on the 12-volt battery to be replaced, the exhaust hole may be plugged.)

① Exhaust hole plug
② Exhaust hole
③ Exhaust hose
④ Hole section of the vehicle

For details, consult your Toyota dealer.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and a vehicle chassis view

WARNING

■When removing the 12-volt battery terminals

Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts any metal in the surrounding area when the positive (+) terminal is removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or serious injury.

■Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
- Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.
- Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.
- Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery.

■12-volt battery precautions

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:

• When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
• Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
  In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.
  ● Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other 12-volt battery-related parts.
• Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.

■After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.

WARNING

■When replacing the 12-volt battery

After replacing, securely attach the exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to the exhaust hole of the replaced 12-volt battery. If not properly installed, gases (hydrogen) may leak into the vehicle interior, and there is the possible danger of the gas igniting and exploding.

NOTICE

■When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan or engine drive belt.

■To prevent damaging the vehicle

The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle.

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge ( P. 100) enters the red zone or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
●“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner's Manual” or “Hybrid System Overheated Output Power Reduced” is shown on the multi-information display
●Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information display

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system.
2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

3 After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

CTH82BT297

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.

① Reservoir
② “F” line
③ “L” line
④ Radiator cap

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

① ② ③ ④ CTH82BT240

Technical line drawing of a car engine bay with three inset views showing engine components (no text or symbols)

6 Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

7 If the fan is not operating:

Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fan is operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

If “Hybrid System Overheated Output Power Reduced” is shown on the multi-information display

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2 Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.
3 After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

CTH82BT299

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is b "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir.

① Reservoir
② “FULL”
③ “LOW”

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

etween the ① ② FULL LOW ③ CTH82BT060

Technical diagram showing engine components and a close-up of a mechanical assembly (no text or symbols visible)

6 After stopping the hybrid system and waiting for 5 minutes or more, start the hybrid system again and check for the multi-information display.

If the message does not disappear:

Stop the hybrid system and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the message is not displayed:

The hybrid system temperature has dropped and the vehicle may be driven normally.

However, if the message appears again frequently, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

• If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
  After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that the "READY" indicator is off. When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury.
• Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.

High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE

■When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power control unit coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

■To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
- Do not use any coolant additives.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

1 Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide traction.
4 Restart the hybrid system.
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press to turn off TRAC.

Traction Control Turned Off CTH82BT303US

WARNING

■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.
- If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

Vehicle specifications

8

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.)...... 544

Fuel information 553

Tire information 556

8-2. Customization

Customizable features ..... 569

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize .... 577

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length		192.1 in. (4880 mm)*2192.7 in. (4895 mm)*3
Overall width 72.4 in. (1840 mm)
Overall height*1		56.9 in. (1445 mm)
Wheelbase 111.2 in. (2825 mm)
Tread*1	Front	63.0 in. (1600 mm)*462.6 in. (1590 mm)*562.2 in. (1580 mm)*6
	Rear	63.2 in. (1605 mm)*462.8 in. (1595 mm)*562.6 in. (1590 mm)*6
Vehicle capacity weight(occupants + luggage)		925 lb. (420 kg)

*1: Unladen vehicles

*2: For LE or XLE grade models

*3: For SE or XSE grade models

*4: 205/65R16 tires

*5: 215/55R17 tires

*6: 235/45R18 and 235/40R19 tires

Seating capacity

Seating capacity 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Vehicle identification

■Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.

Diagram showing a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

This number is also on the Certification Label.

Line drawing of a car door handle with a black arrow pointing to the lock (no text or symbols present)

■Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating motion or force (no text or symbols present)

Engine

Model A25A-FXS
Type 4-cylinder in line,	4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke	3.44 × 4.07 in. (87.5 × 103.4 mm)
Displacement 151.8 cu. in. (2487 cm ^3 )
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)	13 gal. (49.3 L, 10.8 Imp. gal.)

Electric motor (Traction motor)

Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 88 kW
Maximum torque	149 ft•lbf (202 N•m, 20.6 kgf•m)

Hybrid battery (Traction battery)

	AXVH70 model* AXVH71	models*
Type Lithium-ion battery		Nickel-metal hydride bat-tery
Voltage 3.7 V/cell 7.2 V/module
Capacity 4.0 Ah 6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity 70 cells	34 modules
Nominal voltage	259 V	244.8 V

*: Checking your vehicle's model: →P. 545

Lubrication system

■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference\*])

With filter 4.8 qt. (4.5 L, 4.0 Imp. qt.)

Without filter 4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-6B multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-16

SAE 0W-16 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-16 is not available, SAE 0W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-16 at the next oil change.

0W-16 °C -18 4 27 °F 0 40 80 Outside temperature CTH91BT010

Oil viscosity (0W-16 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-16 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 16 in 0W-16 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

API registered mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE SAE 0W-16 CERTIFIED FOR GASOLINE ENGINES TM CTH91BT044

Cooling system

Capacity(Reference)	▶ Gasoline engine6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp. qt.)▶ Power control unit1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type	Use either of the following:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technologyDo not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plugMake DENSO FC16HR-Q8Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE

■Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.

Electrical system

12-volt batteryOpen voltage at 68°F (20°C):	12.0 V or higherIf the voltage is lower than the standard value charge the battery.(When checking the voltage, after turning the power switch off, wait for 30 seconds with the high beam headlights illuminated, then turn the high beam headlights off and check the voltage.)
Charging rates 5 A max.

Hybrid transmission

Fluid capacity* 4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■Hybrid transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibration, or ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Brakes

Pedal clearance* 3.3 in. (85 mm)
Pedal free play	0.04 — 0.24 in. (1 — 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type	FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704

*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 31 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels

▶ Type A

Tire size 205/65R16 95H, T	155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tireinflation pressure)	Driving under normal conditionsFront:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2or bar)Rear:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2or bar)Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph[160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size	16 × 6 1/2 J, 17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft·lbf (1	103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

▶ Type B

Tire size 215/55R17 94V, T	155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tireinflation pressure)	Driving under normal conditionsFront:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2or bar)Rear:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2or bar)Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph[160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size	17 × 7 1/2 J, 17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (1	103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

▶ Type C

Tire size 235/45R18 94V, T	155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tireinflation pressure)	Driving under normal conditionsFront:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph[160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size	18 × 8 J, 17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft·lbf (1	103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

▶ Type D

Tire size 235/40R19 92V, T	155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tireinflation pressure)	Driving under normal conditionsFront:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2or bar)Rear:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2or bar)Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph[160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size	19 × 8 J, 17 × 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (1	103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Light bulbs*1

	Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior	Front side marker lights (bulb type)	W5W 5 A
	Front turn signal/ parking lights (bulb type)	7444NA 28/8 B
	Rear turn signal lights (bulb type)	WY21W 21 B
	Rear side marker lights (bulb type)	W5W 5 A
	Back-up lights (bulb type)	921 16 A
Interior	Rear interior light*2	— 8	C
	Door courtesy lights*2	— 5	A
	Trunk light — 5A

A: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

C: Double end bulbs

*1: Light bulbs not listed in this table are LED bulbs.
*2: If equipped

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
- All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA's lowest additives concentration program.
● Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

■Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.

Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

- Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol. E30 (30% ethanol) E50 (50% ethanol) E85 (85% ethanol)

• If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
  ● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

If your engine knocks

• Consult your Toyota dealer.
• You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

■Notice on fuel quality

• Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
• Do not use leaded gasoline.
  Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
• Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
  Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
  ● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
  At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Full-size tire

NAME OF TIRE 215/55R17 94V M+S TUROLEX S TEMPERATURE X ELETIC TUROLEX TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPEREDURE S NAME DOT XXX XXX XXXX MANUFACTURE'S NAME CTH91BT015

▶ Compact spare tire

MANUFACTURE'S NAME INFLATE TO XXX DOT XXX XXXXXX TMPY RARY USE ONLY TUBELESS TEMPORARY USE ONLY TETRARY USE ONLY TETRARY USE ONLY 10 11 5 9 8 1 CTH91BT037

① Tire size ( P. 559)
② Summer tires or all season tires ( P. 451)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

③ TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

④ Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.

⑤ DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( P. 558)
⑥ Location of treadwear indicators ( P. 444)
⑦ Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see "Uniform Tire Quality Grading" that follows.

⑧ Maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P. 550)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
⑨ Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 450)
⑩ Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

⑪ "TEMPORARY USE ONLY"

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

▶ Type A ▶ Type B

graph TD
    A["②"] --> B["XX"]
    A --> C["XXX"]
    A --> D["XXXX"]
    B --> E["1"]
    C --> F["3"]
    C --> G["4"]
    D --> H["5"]
    D --> I["6"]
    D --> J["7"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style F fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style G fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style H fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style I fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style J fill:#fff,stroke:#000

graph TD
    A["2"] --> B["XXX"]
    A --> C["XXXXXX"]
    A --> D["XXXX"]
    B --> E["1"]
    B --> F["3"]
    C --> G["8"]
    C --> H["6"]
    C --> I["7"]

① DOT symbol*
② Tire Identification Number (TIN)
③ Tire manufacturer's identification mark
④ Tire size code
⑤ Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
⑥ Manufacturing week
⑦ Manufacturing year
⑧ Manufacturer's code

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Tire size

■Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

① Tire use (P = Passenger car times omitted], T = Temporary use)
② Section width (millimeters)
③ Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
④ Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
⑤ Wheel diameter (inches)
⑥ Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
⑦ Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions

① Section width
② Tire height
③ Wheel diameter

[some- P215/55R17 94V ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ CTH91BT008

① ② ③ CTH91BT009

Tire section names

① Bead
② Sidewall
③ Shoulder
④ Tread
⑤ Belt
⑥ Inner liner
⑦ Reinforcing rubber
⑧ Carcass
⑨ Rim lines
⑩ Bead wires
⑪ Chafer

4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CTH90AK007

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure	Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight	The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight	The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle weight	The sum of:(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight	150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution	Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below
Tire related term	Meaning
Production options weight	The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard i replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim	A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)	Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim	diameter and width
Rim type designation	The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)	The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side	The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Bead	The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation	A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

t e m

Tire related term	Meaning
Bias ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass	The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking	The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord	The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation	The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking	Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT	A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is de with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove	The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner	The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation	The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
Intended outboard sidewall	(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

signe

Tire related term	Meaning
Light truck (LT) tire	A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating	The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating	The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Open splice	Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire	A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation	A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire	A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall	That portion of a tire between the thread bead
Sidewall separation	The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire	A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol () on at least one sidewall
Test rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tread	That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
Tread rib	A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation	Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)	The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture	The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

*: Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in	front
5 through 10 3		2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5		2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
16 through 20 7		2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed using the multi-information display, on the audio system screen, or at your Toyota dealer.

Customizing vehicle features

When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.

■Changing on the audio system screen

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Setup" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "Vehicle" on the "Setup" screen.
4 Select "Vehicle Customization".

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

■Changing using the multi-information display

→P. 109, 126

Customizable features

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

① Settings that can be changed on the audio system screen
② Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display ( P. 100, 104, 117)

Function Default setting Customized		setting	1	2
Language English		French	O	—
		Spanish
Units* miles (MPG US)		miles (MPG Imperial)	O	—km (L/100)
		km (km/L)
Convenience services(Suggestion function)	On	On(when the vehicle is stopped)	O	O
		Off

*: The default setting varies according to country.

■ Door lock ( P. 154, 160, 527)

Function Default setting Customized		setting	1	2
Unlocking using a mechanical key	Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps	All doors unlocked in one step.	—	O
Automatic door lock	Shift position linked door locking operation	Off	O	O
		Speed linked door locking operation
Automatic door unlock	Shift position linked door unlocking operation	Off	O	O
		Driver's door linked door unlocking operation
Locking/unlocking of the trunk when all doors are locked/unlocked	On Off — O

■Smart key system and wireless remote control ( P. 154, 160, 164)

Function Default setting Customized setting			1	2
Operation buzzer volume	5 Off to 7	O O
Operation signal (Emergency flashers)	On Off O O
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked	60 seconds	Off	O	O
		30 seconds
		120 seconds
Open door warning buzzer	On Off	— O

■ Smart key system ( P. 154, 160, 164)

Function Default setting Customized setting			1	2
Smart key system	On	Off	O	—
Smart door unlocking	Driver's door	All the doors	O	O
Time elapsed before unlocking all the door when gripping and holding the driver's door handle	2 seconds	Off	—	O
Number of consecutive door lock operations	2 times	As many as desired	—	O

■ Wireless remote control ( P. 150, 154, 160)

Function Default setting Customized		setting	1	2
Wireless remote control On Off — O
Unlocking operation	Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps	All doors unlocked in one step	O	O
Trunk unlocking operation	Press and hold (short)	One short press	—	O
		Push twice
		Press and hold (long)
		Off
Panic function On Off — O
Reservation lock On Off O	O

■ Power windows and moon roof * (→P. 183, 186)

Function Default setting Customized setting			1	2
Mechanical key linked operation	Off On — O
Wireless remote control linked operation	Off On (open only) — O
Wireless remote control linked operation signal (buzzer)	On Off — O

*: If equipped

■ Moon roof* (→P. 186)

Function Default setting Customized setting			1	2
Linked operation of components when mechanical key is used (open only)	Slide only	Tilt only	—	O
Linked operation of components when wireless remote control is used	Slide only	Tilt only	—	O

*: If equipped

■ Automatic light control system ( P. 230)

Function Default setting Customized		setting	1	2
Light sensor sensitivity	Standard	-2 to 2	O	O
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed	30 seconds	Off	O	O60 second
		90 seconds

■ Lights (→P. 230)

Function Default setting Customized setting			1	2
Daytime running light system (except Canada)	On	Off	O	O
Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination	On	Off	—	O

■ Intuitive parking assist* (→P. 317)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		1	2
Detection distance of the front center sensor	Far	Near	—	O
Detection distance of the rear center sensor	Far	Near	—	O

*: If equipped

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)* (→P. 310)

Function Default setting Customized		setting	1	2
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness	Bright	Dim	—	O
Notification timing for presence of approaching vehicle (sensitivity)	Middle	Early	—	O
		Late
		Only when vehicle detected in blind spot

*: If equipped

■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ^* ( P. 326)

Function Default setting Customized		setting	1	2
RCTA buzzer volume 2		1	—	O
		3

*: If equipped

■ Automatic air conditioning system ( P. 366)

Function Default setting Customized setting			1	2
A/C auto switch operation	Auto Manual O O

■ Illumination ( P. 378)

Function Default setting Customized		setting	1	2
Time elapsed before lights turn off	15 seconds	Off	0	07.5
		30 seconds
Operation after the power switch turned off	On	Off	—	0
Operation when the doors are unlocked	On	Off	—	0
Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person	On	Off	—	0
Footwell lights*	On	Off	—	0
Instrument panel ornament light* and inside door handle lights*	On	Off	—	0

*: If equipped

WARNING

During customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item When to initialize Reference
Message indicating maintenance is required (on some models)	After the maintenance is performed	P. 420
Tire pressure warning system	When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weightWhen the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when the tire size is changedWhen rotating the tiresAfter performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure	P. 446

For owners

9

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.... 580

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners .... 581

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 582

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 583

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defects Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline [phone], mail Transport Canada - ASFAD, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5, or complete the online form at https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls.

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Line drawing of a person sitting on a chair holding a long object, no text or symbols present

Entretien et soin

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ CTH11BT057

◆ Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS

Technical diagram of a car's internal components with numbered parts for identification

For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to "NAV-IGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

• Navigation system
• Audio system
• Rear view monitor system
  • Toyota parking assist monitor
• Panoramic view monitor
• Connected Services

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

• If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 151)
• If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (→P. 153)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 470)
●Is the power switch in ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. ( P. 208)
●Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (→P. 167)

The rear door cannot be opened

●Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( P. 157)

The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside

● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (→P. 161)

If you think something is wrong

The hybrid system does not start

• Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (→P. 206)
  ● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 209)
  ● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 164)
  ● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 210)
  ●Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 528)
  ● Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (→P. 530)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

●Is the power switch in ON mode? If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the power switch in ON mode. (→P. 220)

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is stopped

- It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P. 210)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

- Is the window lock switch pressed? The power window except for the one at the driver's seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 183)

The power switch is turned off automatically

● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. (→P. 209)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

●The seat belt reminder light is flashing Are the driver and the passenger wearing the seat belts? (→P. 500)
●The parking brake indicator is on Is the parking brake released? (→P. 223)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (→P. 497, 507)

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds

- Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm? The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 90) To stop the alarm, turn the power switch to ON mode or start the hybrid system.

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

●Is the message displayed on the multi-information display? Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P. 507)

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

- When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to P. 497, 507.

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

- Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (→P. 513)

The vehicle becomes stuck

● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (→P. 541)

Alphabetical index

A

A/C 366

Air conditioning filter 463

Automatic air conditioning system.... 366

Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW)..... 368

AAC disc*

ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System)..... 303

Warning light.... 498

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting

System 79

Adaptive Front-lighting

System (AFS)...... 231

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting

System) 231

Air conditioning filter 463

Air conditioning

system.... 366

Air conditioning filter 463

Automatic air conditioning system.... 366

Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW)..... 368

Airbags 34

Airbag operating conditions.... 43

Airbag precautions for your child.... 37

Airbag warning light 497

Correct driving posture ..... 26

Curtain shield airbag operating conditions .... 43

Curtain shield airbag precautions.... 40

Front passenger occupant classification system .... 47

General airbag precautions .... 37

Locations of airbags 34

Modification and disposal of airbags 42

Side airbag operating conditions 43

Side airbag precautions...... 37

Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions .... 43

Side and curtain shield airbags precautions...... 37

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners .... 583

SRS airbags 34

Alarm 90

Anchor brackets 56

Antennas

(smart key system)...... 164

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) 303

Warning light.... 498

Approach warning 296

Armrest...... 401

Assist grips.... 401

Audio*

Audio Plus*

Audio system*

Automatic air conditioning

system.... 366

Air conditioning filter 463

Automatic headlight leveling

system.... 233

Automatic High Beam 234

Automatic light control

system.... 230

Auxiliary boxes 385

B

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulb ..... 481, 486

Wattage 552

Battery (12-volt battery) ...... 440

Battery checking...... 440

If the battery is discharged ... 530

Preparing and checking

before winter 360

Replacing.... 534

Battery (traction battery) ..... 82

Hybrid battery

(traction battery)

air intake vent...... 465

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)...... 310

Blind Spot Monitor

function.... 313

Bluetooth®*

Bottle holders 383

Brake

Brake Hold.... 227

Fluid.... 549

Parking brake 223

Warning light.... 497

Brake assist 303

Brake Hold 227

Warning light.... 498

Brake override system...... 193

Break-in tips 194

Brightness control

Instrument panel light

control 101

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)...... 310

Blind Spot Monitor

function.... 313

C

Care

Exterior 412

Interior...... 416

Seat belts.... 417

Wheels and wheel ornaments 413

Cargo capacity...... 203

CD player\*

Chains.... 361

Child restraint system...... 54

Booster seats installation...... 64

Convertible seats installation .... 62

Front passenger occupant classification system...... 47

Infant seats definition.... 61

Infant seats installation ..... 56

Installing CRS with LATCH anchors .... 67

Installing CRS with seat belts.... 61

Installing CRS with top tether strap.... 70

LATCH anchors 67

Child safety 53

12-volt battery precautions...... 442, 535

Airbag precautions.... 37

Battery precautions..... 442, 535

Child restraint system .... 54

How your child should wear the seat belt.... 30

Installing child restraints ..... 54

Moon roof precautions...... 189

Power window lock switch.... 183

Power window precautions... 185

Rear door child-protectors.... 157

Removed electronic key battery precautions...... 471

Seat belt extender precautions.... 33

Seat belt precautions...... 32

Seat heater precautions ..... 375

Trunk precautions...... 162

Child-protectors 157

Cleaning 412, 416

Exterior 412

Interior 416

Seat belts.... 417

Wheels and wheel ornaments 413

Clock.... 104, 117

Coat hooks...... 402

Condenser.... 437

Connected Services\*

Console box.... 382

Consumption screen 145, 146

Coolant

Capacity.... 548

Checking.... 436

Preparing and checking before winter.... 360

Cooling system...... 436

Hybrid system overheating.... 537

Cruise control

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ..... 287

Cup holders.... 384

Curtain shield airbags...... 35

Customizable features ..... 569

D

Daytime running light

system.... 232

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors 370

Rear window 370

Windshield 370

Dimensions 544

Dinghy towing.... 205

Display

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ..... 287

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .... 267

Multi-information display 104, 117

Warning messages...... 507

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 427

Door courtesy lights

Location 378

Wattage 552

Door lock

Doors.... 154

Key 527

Smart key system 154

Wireless remote control..... 154

Doors 154

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems..... 157

Door lock 156

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 181

Rear door child-protector..... 157

Side doors 154

Side windows.... 183

Drive information...... 107

Drive-Start Control (DSC) ..... 193

Sudden start restraint control 193

Driving

Break-in tips.... 194

Correct posture...... 26

Hybrid vehicle driving tips..... 357

Procedures 192

Winter drive tips.... 360

DSC (Drive-Start Control) ..... 193

Sudden start restraint control 193

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ...... 287

E

ECO Accelerator Guidance..... 123

Eco drive mode.... 355

Eco-friendly driving information 121

Eco guide 123

Eco score 123

EDR (Event data recorder)...... 9

Electric motor (traction motor) 78

Electric Power Steering (EPS).... 304

Warning light.... 498

Electronic key 150

Battery-saving function ..... 166

If the electronic key does not operate properly .... 527

Replacing the battery...... 470

Emergency flashers ..... 490

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer sounds.... 497

If a warning light turns on ..... 497

If a warning message is displayed 507

If the 12-volt battery is discharged....530

If the electronic key does not operate properly .... 527

If the hybrid system will not start .... 525

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising.... 492

If you have a flat tire 513

If you lose your keys...... 151

If you think something is wrong 496

If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 541

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency... 491

If your vehicle needs to be towed.... 493

If your vehicle overheats..... 537

Engine

ACCESSORY mode..... 208

Compartment...... 432

Engine switch 206

Hood.... 429

How to start the hybrid system.... 206

Identification number 545

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 491

Ignition switch (power switch) 206

Overheating.... 537

Power switch 206

Engine coolant

Capacity.... 548

Checking.... 436

Preparing and checking before winter.... 360

Engine coolant temperature

gauge.... 100

Engine oil

Capacity.... 547

Checking.... 433

Preparing and checking before winter.... 360

Engine switch 206

Enhanced VSC 303

EPS

(Electric Power Steering)..... 304

Warning light.... 498

EV drive mode...... 213

Event data recorder (EDR)...... 9

Exclusive jump starting terminal 530

F

Flat tire.... 513

Floor mats 24

Fluid

Brake 549

Hybrid transmission 549

Washer 439

Front interior light 379

Front passenger occupant classification system...... 47

Front passenger's seat belt reminder light.... 500

Front personal lights...... 380

Front seats 171

Adjustment.... 171

Cleaning......416

Correct driving posture 26

Head restraints 175

Seat heaters 375

Seat ventilators.... 375

Front side marker lights

Light switch.... 230

Replacing light bulbs .... 478, 486

Wattage 552

Front turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs .... 477, 486

Turn signal lever.... 222

Wattage 552

Fuel

Capacity.... 546

Fuel gauge.... 100

Information.... 553

Refueling 242

Type.... 546, 553

Warning light.... 500

Fuel consumption 145

When the fuel filler door cannot be opened 245

Fuses 473

G

(for cellular phone)*

Head restraints 175

Head-up display.... 136

Headlights 230

Automatic headlight leveling 233

Automatic High Beam...... 234

Light switch.... 230

Replacing light bulbs .... 486

Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination...... 233

Heated steering wheel...... 376

Heaters

Automatic air conditioning system.... 366

Heated steering wheel......376

Outside rear view mirrors..... 370

Seat heaters ....375

Seat ventilators.... 375

High mounted stoplight

Replacing...... 486

High voltage components...... 82

Hill-start assist control...... 304

Hood 429

Hooks

Coat hooks...... 402

Grocery bag hooks 387

Retaining hooks (floor mat).....24

Horn 177

HUD (Head-up display)...... 136

Hybrid battery

(traction battery)...... 82

Hybrid battery

(traction battery) air

intake vent 83,465

Hybrid system.... 78

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System 79

Emergency shut off system .... 83

Energy monitor/ consumption screen ...... 142

EV drive mode 213

High voltage components ..... 82

Hybrid System Indicator..... 102

Hybrid system precautions ..... 82

Hybrid vehicle driving tips..... 357

If the hybrid system will not start .... 525

Overheating 537

Power (ignition) switch...... 206

Starting the hybrid system .... 206

Hybrid System Indicator ..... 102

Hybrid transmission...... 216

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 220

|

Identification

Engine 545

Vehicle.... 545

Ignition switch

(power switch)...... 206

Illuminated entry system ..... 380

Immobilizer system.... 89

I/M test 426

Indicators 97

Initialization

Items to initialize 577

Parking Support Brake ...... 345

Tire pressure warning system .... 446

Inside rear view mirror...... 179

Instrument panel light

control.... 101

Interior lights 378

Switch.... 379

Intuitive parking assist ...... 317

J

Jack

Positioning the jack...... 431

Engine switch.... 206

If the electronic key does not operate properly .... 527

If you lose your keys...... 151

Key number plate.... 150

Keyless entry 150

Mechanical key...... 151

Power switch.... 206

Replacing the battery...... 470

Warning buzzer.... 165

Wireless remote control..... 150

Knee airbags.... 34

L

Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)..... 267

Language (multi-information display)..... 113, 132

LATCH anchors 67

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever...... 429

Hood lock release lever..... 429

Internal trunk release lever... 161

Shift lever.... 216

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever 177

Turn signal lever.... 222

Wiper lever 238

License plate lights

Light switch.... 230

Replacing light bulbs ..... 486

Light bulbs

Replacing...... 476

Wattage 552

Lights

Automatic High Beam...... 234

Headlight switch 230

Illuminated entry system..... 380

Interior lights.... 379

Interior lights list...... 378

Personal lights.... 380

Replacing light bulbs ..... 476

Trunk light.... 161

Turn signal lever.... 222

Vanity lights 388

Wattage 552

Load capacity 203

Lock steering column ..... 177

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)..... 267

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance... 427

General maintenance .....422

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent.... 465

Maintenance data 544

Maintenance requirements 419

Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required.... 420

Malfunction indicator lamp..... 497

Meter 100

Head-up display.... 136

Indicators 97

Instrument panel light control.... 101

Meters.... 100

Multi-information display 104, 117

Settings.... 109, 126

Warning lights.... 95

Warning messages...... 507

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror ..... 179

Outside rear view mirror defoggers .... 370

Outside rear view mirrors..... 181

Vanity mirrors.... 388

Mobile Assistant\*

Moon roof...... 186

Door lock linked moon roof operation .... 187

Jam protection function...... 187

Operation 186

MP3 disc\*

Multi-information

display.... 104, 117

Drive information 107

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range...... 287

Eco-friendly driving information 121

Language.... 113, 132

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).... 267

Outside temperature...... 100

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 252

Settings.... 109, 126

Suggestion function..... 114, 133

Warning messages...... 507

N

Navigation system\*

Noise from under vehicle ...... 6

0

Odometer 100

Oil

Engine oil.... 547

Opener

Fuel filler door.... 244

Hood.... 429

Trunk 160

Outside rear view mirrors..... 181

Adjusting and folding ..... 181

Blind spot monitor (BSM)..... 310

Outside rear view mirror defoggers .... 370

Outside temperature

display.... 100

Overheating 537

P

Paddle shift switches 219

Panic mode 151

Panoramic view monitor*

Parking brake.... 223

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer/ message.... 226 Warning light.... 498

Parking lights.... 230

Light switch.... 230 Replacing light bulbs....477, 486 Wattage .... 552

Parking Support Brake (PKSB).... 340

Indicator....97
Warning light....499
Warning messages....345

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles).... 352

Function 352

Parking Support Brake function (static objects)...... 348

Function 348

PCS (Pre-Collision System)...... 252

Warning light 499

Personal lights.... 380

Phone switch*

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)...... 340

Indicator....97 Warning light....499 Warning messages....345

Power control unit 82

Power control unit coolant ..... 436 Capacity..... 548

Checking.... 436 Preparing and checking before winter.... 360

Power outlet...... 389

Power steering

(Electric power steering system) 304 Warning light 498

Power switch 206

Power windows 183

Door lock linked window operation .... 184 Jam protection function .... 183 Operation.... 183 Window lock switch .... 183

Pre-Collision System (PCS) 252 Warning light 499

Premium Audio*

R

Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range) 287

Radiator.... 437 Radio*

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..... 326 RCTA Function..... 328

Rear Camera Detection Function.... 335

Rear Cross Traffic Alert .... 326 RCTA Function.... 328

Rear interior lights .... 379 Wattage .... 552

Rear passengers' seat belt reminder light 500

Rear personal lights...... 380

Rear seat Folding down .... 173

Rear side marker lights

Light switch.... 230

Replacing light bulbs.....483, 486

Wattage 552

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.....483, 486

Turn signal lever 222

Wattage 552

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror ..... 179

Outside rear view mirrors..... 181

Rear view monitor system\*

Rear window defogger ..... 370

Refueling 242

Capacity.... 546

Fuel types 546, 553

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 244

When the fuel filler door cannot be opened.... 245

Replacing

Electronic key battery ..... 470

Fuses.... 473

Light bulbs 476

Tires.... 513

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners...... 580

Resetting the message

indicating maintenance is

required...... 420

Road accident cautions ...... 86

Road Sign Assist 282

RSA (Road Sign Assist) ...... 282

S

Safety Connect 73

Seat belt reminder light ..... 500

Seat belts 28

Adjusting the seat belt ..... 29

Automatic Locking Retractor .... 30

Child restraint system installation .... 54

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt.... 417

Emergency Locking Retractor .... 30

How to wear your seat belt..... 28

How your child should wear the seat belt.... 30

Pregnant women, proper seat belt use.... 31

Reminder light and buzzer.... 500

Seat belt extender 30

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners .... 582

Seat belt pretensioners...... 29

SRS warning light 497

Seat heaters 375

Seating capacity 203

Seat ventilators.... 375

Seats...... 171, 173

Adjustment.... 171

Adjustment precautions..... 172

Child seats/child restraint system installation...... 54

Cleaning 416

Folding down the rear seatbacks.... 173

Head restraints 175

Properly sitting in the seat ..... 26

Seat heaters 375

Seat ventilators.... 375

Sensor

Automatic headlight system.... 232

Automatic High Beam system.... 234

Front camera 247

Inside rear view mirror ..... 180

Intuitive parking assist ..... 317

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .... 267

Radar sensor 247

Service plug 82

Service reminder indicators 94

Shift lever 216

Hybrid transmission 216

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .... 220

S mode 218

Shift lock system 220

Side airbags 35

Side marker lights 230

Light switch.... 230

Replacing light bulbs...... 478, 483, 486

Wattage 552

Side mirrors 181

Adjusting and folding ..... 181

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ..... 310

Side turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.... 486

Turn signal lever 222

Smart key system 164

Antenna location....164

Entry functions...... 154, 160

Starting the hybrid system ....206

Snow tires 362

Spare tire 513

Inflation pressure 550

Storage location....513

Spark plug.... 548

Specifications 544

Speedometer.... 100

Sport mode 355

Steering lock

Column lock release...... 210

Steering wheel 177

Adjustment.... 177

Audio switches*

Heated steering wheel...... 376

Meter control

switches 105, 119

Stoplights

Replacing light bulbs .... 486

Storage feature 381

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes

stuck.... 541

Sun visors 388

Sunshade

Roof.... 187

Switches

Audio remote control switches*

Automatic High Beam

switch 234

Brake hold switch 227

Cruise control switch ..... 287

Door lock switches.... 156

Driving mode select switches 355

Emergency flasher switch..... 490

EV drive mode switch...... 213

Fuel door opener switch ..... 244

Garage door opener switches 403

Heated steering wheel...... 376

Ignition switch.... 206

Light switch.... 230

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch 275

Meter control

switches.... 105, 119

Moon roof switches...... 186

"ODO/TRIP" switch ..... 105, 119

Outside rear view mirror

switches.... 181

Paddle shift switches ..... 219

Parking brake switch...... 223

Phone switch*

Power switch.... 206

Power window switches..... 183

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror

defoggers switch 370

Seat heater switches ..... 375

"SOS" button.... 73

Talk switch*

Trunk opener switch 160

Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance switch 287

VSC OFF switch 304

Window lock switch...... 183

Windshield wiper and

washer switch.... 238

T

Tail lights

Light switch.... 230

Replacing light bulbs......486

Talk switch

Theft deterrent system

Alarm 90

Immobilizer system...... 89

Tire inflation pressure...... 458

Maintenance data 550

Warning light.... 501

Tire information 556

Glossary 563

Size.... 559

Tire identification number ..... 558

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading 561

Tire pressure warning

system

Initializing...... 446

Installing tire pressure

warning valve and

transmitters 446

Registering ID codes ...... 448

Warning light.... 501

Tires.... 444

Chains 361

Checking...... 444

Glossary 563

If you have a flat tire ..... 513

Inflation pressure 550

Replacing.... 513

Rotating tires 444

Size...... 550

Snow tires.... 362

Spare tire 513

Tire pressure warning

system...... 445

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading 561

Warning light.... 501

Tools.... 513

Top tether strap 70

Total load capacity 203

Towing

Dinghy towing.... 205

Emergency towing...... 493

Trailer towing.... 204

Toyota parking assist monitor\*

Toyota Safety Sense 2.5+ ...... 246

Automatic High Beam ...... 234

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ..... 287

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .... 267

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 252

TRAC (Traction Control) ...... 303

Traction battery

(hybrid battery)...... 82

Traction Control (TRAC) ...... 303

Traction motor

(electric motor) 78

Trailer towing 204

Transmission

Driving mode select switches.... 355

Hybrid transmission 216

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .... 220

Paddle shift switches ...... 219

S mode 218

Trip meters 100

Trunk...... 160

Grocery bag hooks 387

Internal trunk release lever ... 161

Smart key system 160

Trunk light.... 161

Trunk opener 160

Wireless remote control..... 160

Trunk light

Trunk light.... 161

Wattage 552

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs...... 477, 483, 486

Turn signal lever 222

Wattage 552

U

USB charging port...... 390

USB memory\*

USB port\*

V

Vanity lights 388

Vanity mirrors 388

Vanity lights 388

Vehicle data recording...... 8

Vehicle identification number.... 545

Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) 303

Voice command system\*

VSC

(Vehicle Stability Control) .... 303

W

Warning buzzers

Approach warning...... 296

Downshifting 219

Electric power steering system.... 498

Intuitive parking assist ..... 320

Lane departure alert function.... 272

Light reminder.... 233

Open door.... 158

Open hood.... 429

Open moon roof.... 188

Open trunk...... 161

Parking brake 498

Pre-collision warning ..... 252

RCD

(Rear Camera Detection)... 335

Seat belt reminder 500

Vehicle sway warning...... 274

Warning lights.... 95

ABS.... 498

Brake hold operated indicator.... 498

Brake system.... 497

Electric power steering .....498

Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator.... 317

Low fuel level.... 500

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) indicator.... 499

Malfunction indicator lamp.... 497

Master warning light.... 500

Parking brake indicator...... 498

PCS warning light 499

PKSB OFF indicator 499

RCD OFF indicator 335

Seat belt reminder light...... 500

Slip indicator 500

SRS 497

Tire pressure.... 501

Warning messages.... 507

Washer.... 238

Checking.... 439

Preparing and checking before winter.... 360

Switch 238

Washing and waxing 412

Weight 544

Cargo capacity.... 203

Load limits 203

Vehicle capacity weight ..... 544

Wheels...... 461

Replacing.... 461

Size.... 550

Window glasses 183

Window lock switch 183

Windows.... 183

Power windows.... 183

Rear window defogger...... 370

Washer 238

Windshield wipers...... 238

Winter driving tips.... 360

Wireless charger 392

Wireless remote control ..... 150

Battery-Saving Function ..... 166

Locking/Unlocking ..... 154, 160

Panic mode.... 151

Replacing the battery...... 470

WMA disc\*

Certifications

▶ Safety Connect

FCC ID: BEJTL19BNN

IC: 2703H-TL19BNN

FCC/IC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacture could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled environment.

The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of least 20cm from all persons.

FCC/IC AVERTISSEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

00

CA

NOTE:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

02

CA

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

NOTE:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body.

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body.

NOTE:

Intuitive parking assist

Product name: Intuitive parking assist

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.

Responsible Party : DENSO International America, Inc.

24777 Denso Drive, P.O. Box 5047, Southfield,

Michigan 48033-5244, U.S.A.

https://www.denso.com/us-ca/en/about-us/company-information/diam/

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

This device complies with part 15 and part 18 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a wireless power charger, pursuant to part 18 of the FCC Rules.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio communications, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body.

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body.

▶ Garage door opener

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

▶ Tire pressure warning system

FCC ID: PAXPMVE000

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: PAXPMVE100

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

"Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate."

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

Auxiliary catch lever Trunk opener Fuel filler door

P. 429 P. 160 P. 242

Side profile line drawing of a sedan car with no text or symbols

CTHPIBT141

Hood lock release lever

P. 429 P. 242

Fuel filler door opener

Tire inflation pressure

P. 550

Fuel tank capacity (Reference)	13 gal. (49.3 L, 10.8 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type P. 546, 553
Cold tire inflation pressure	P. 550
Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill — reference)	P. 547
Engine oil type	“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentP. 547